Agenda packet — Redlands City Council, October 21, 2025 (part 6 of 8)

1. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.

3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.

2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.

4. In Underground Force Main Piping:
a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings. b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.

4. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

5. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

6. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

7. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 9
100% Design Submittal
C. Install hangers for PVC piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

E. Support vertical runs of cast iron soil piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

F. Support vertical runs for PVC piping to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.
a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main.

2. Sewage Pump: To sewage pump discharge.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 10
100% Design Submittal

3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired.
a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent piping until it has been tested and approved.
a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in.
a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water.
b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop.
c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.

Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 11
100% Design Submittal
c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection.
d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has been tested and approved.
a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. a. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. b. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

E. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping are any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 12
100% Design Submittal

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, vent piping are any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping are any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI cast-iron hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

3. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

END OF SECTION 221316
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Cleanouts.

2. Roof flashing assemblies.

3. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.

4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS
A. Sanitary waste piping specialties bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Stainless Steel Exposed Cleanouts:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1. Standard: ASME A112.3.1.

2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

3. Body Material: Stainless steel tee with side cleanout as required to match connected piping.

4. Closure: Stainless steel plug with seal.

B. Stainless Steel Exposed Floor Cleanouts:

1. Standard: ASME A112.3.1.

2. Size: Same as connected branch.

3. Housing: Stainless steel.

4. Closure: Stainless steel with seal.

5. Riser: ASTM A74, Service class, stainless steel drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

6. Body or Ferrule: Stainless steel.

7. Clamping Device: Required.

8. Outlet Connection: Threaded.

9. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

10. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads set screws or other device.

11. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel.

12. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

13. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:

1. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.
a. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
b. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. c. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:

1. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve-and-stack fitting with firestopping plug.

2. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.

3. Sleeve: Molded-PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

4. Stack Fitting: ASTM A48/A48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

5. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, castiron soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C564 rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.

B. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal.
b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

D. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping.

E. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

F. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319 - 4
100% Design Submittal
G. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

H. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.

3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.

4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration-isolation and seismic-control devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." G. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." H. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319 - 5
100% Design Submittal
I. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

J. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

K. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

L. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

M. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

O. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

P. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." B. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required.

C. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty.

D. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319 - 6
100% Design Submittal
E. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

F. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." G. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.

1. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 221319
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Drains
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319.13 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 221319.13 - SANITARY DRAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Floor drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.

D. PE: Polyethylene.

E. PP: Polypropylene.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES
A. Sanitary drains bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary piping specialty components. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Drains
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319.13 - 2
100% Design Submittal

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Stainless Steel Floor Drains, ASME A112.3.1:

1. Outlet: Bottom.

2. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.

3. Top Shape: Round.

4. Seepage Flange: Required.

5. Anchor Flange: Required.

6. Clamping Device: Required.

7. Trap-Primer Connection: Required.

8. Trap Material: Stainless steel.

9. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1- inch total depression.

4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring.
a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained.

1. Set grates of drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with ASME A112.3.1 for installation of stainless steel channel drainage systems.

1. Install on support devices, so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.

D. Install open drain fittings with top of hub 1 inch above floor. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Drains
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319.13 - 3
100% Design Submittal

B. Comply with requirements in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater valves, air admittance devices and miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 221323 "Sanitary Waste Interceptors" for grease interceptors, grease-removal devices, oil interceptors, sand interceptors, and solid interceptors.

D. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 221319.13
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Drains
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221319.13 - 4
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters Renovation & Expansion Final Design 223300 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Flow-control, electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters.

2. Thermostat-control, electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters.

3. Domestic-water heater accessories.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and use.

B. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters Renovation & Expansion Final Design 223300 - 2
100% Design Submittal

2.2 ELECTRIC, TANKLESS, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
A. Flow-Control, Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Basis of design: Chronomite INSTANT FLOW® MICRO MIX™

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
a. Bradley Corporation.
b. Eemax, Inc.; a Rheem brand.
c. Stiebel Eltron, Inc.

3. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single manufacturer.

4. Standard: UL 499 for electric, tankless, (domestic-water heater) heating appliance.

6. Support: Bracket for wall mounting.

B. Thermostat-Control, Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Basis of design: Chronomite INSTANT FLOW® INSTANT-TEMP™

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Bradley Corporation.
b. Eemax, Inc.; a Rheem brand.
c. Stiebel Eltron, Inc.

3. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single manufacturer.

4. Standard: UL 499 for electric, tankless, (domestic-water heater) heating appliance.

5. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable water, without storage capacity.
a. Connections: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c. Heating Element: Resistance heating system.
d. Temperature Control: Thermostat.
e. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system. f. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters Renovation & Expansion Final Design 223300 - 3
100% Design Submittal

6. Support: Bracket for wall mounting.

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than workingpressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

B. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters at least 18 inches above floor on wall bracket.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, in accordance with layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping." ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters Renovation & Expansion Final Design 223300 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices.

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend domestic-water heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." F. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

G. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

H. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air to required system pressure.

I. Install dielectric fittings in all locations where piping of dissimilar metals is to be joined. Verify the wetted surface of the dielectric fitting contacted by potable water contains less than 0.25 percent of lead by weight.

3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters Renovation & Expansion Final Design 223300 - 5
100% Design Submittal
C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain tankless, electric, domestic-water heaters. Training: a minimum of one hour.

END OF SECTION 223300
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters Renovation & Expansion Final Design 223300 - 6
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Water Closets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224213.13 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Water closets.

2. Flushometer valves.

3. Toilet seats.

4. Supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two reduced flushes and one full flush per fixture.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water closets.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BACK-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, back outlet, top spud. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Water Closets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224213.13 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Standard.
b. Kohler Co.
c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china.
c. Type: Siphon jet.
d. Style: Flushometer valve.
e. Height: Standard.
f. Rim Contour: Elongated.
g. Water Consumption: Maximum 1.28 gal. per flush.
h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.
i. Color: White.

3. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

2.2 WALL-MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets: Wall mounted, top spud, accessible.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Standard.
b. Kohler Co.
c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

3. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Water Closets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224213.13 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2.3 FLUSHOMETER VALVES
A. Hard-Wired, Solenoid-Actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Standard.
b. Sloan Valve Company.
c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1037.

3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

8. Style: Concealed.

9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

10. Trip Mechanism: Hard-wired electronic sensor complying with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

11. Consumption: Maximum 1.28 gal. per flush.

12. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.

13. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.

2.4 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Standard.
b. Kohler Co.
c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.

3. Material: Plastic.

4. Type: Commercial (Standard).

5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

6. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check.

7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

8. Seat Cover: Required.

9. Color: White.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Water Closets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224213.13 - 4
100% Design Submittal

2.5 SUPPORTS
A. Water Closet Carrier:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. WATTS; A Watts Water Technologies Company.
b. Zurn Industries, LLC.
c. Josam Company.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

3. Description: Waste-fitting assembly, as required to match drainage piping material and arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to piping or building substrate.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.

3. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.

4. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Water Closets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224213.13 - 5
100% Design Submittal
C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Water Closets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224213.13 - 6
100% Design Submittal
B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION 224213.13
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Lavatories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224216.13 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Lavatories.

2. Shampoo bowls.

3. Faucets.

4. Supply fittings.

5. Waste fittings.

6. Supports.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES
A. Lavatory: Wheelchair, vitreous china, wall mounted.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Standard.
b. Kohler Co.
c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Lavatories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224216.13 - 2
100% Design Submittal
b. Type: Slab or wheelchair.
c. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 27 by 20 inches.
d. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes, 2-inch centers.
e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.
f. Color: White.
g. Mounting: For concealed-arm carrier.

3. Support: Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier.

4. Lavatory Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.

2.2 SHAMPOO BOWLS
A. Shampoo Bowls: Plastic.

1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6.
b. Material: Plastic.
c. Bowl: Shaped for head rest.
d. Nominal Size: 19 by 19 by 10 inches.
e. Color: White.
f. Mounting Material: Wall bracket.

2. Faucet: Manufacturer's standard with vacuum breaker complying with ASME A112.18.3 and with hose spray head.

3. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article except as follows:
a. Drain: Cup type with hair basket and NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece. b. Trap Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2.3 SOLID-BRASS, MANUALLY OPERATED FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Lavatory Faucets: Manual-type, single-control mixing, commercial, solid-brass valve.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Standard.
b. Elkay.
c. Kohler Co.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

4. Body Type: Single hole.

5. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Lavatories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224216.13 - 3
100% Design Submittal

6. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

7. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm at 60 psi.

8. Mounting Type: Deck, exposed.

9. Valve Handle(s): Single lever.

10. Spout: Swing type.

2.4 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet-spout-outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Description: Chrome-plated-brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminar stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment to faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes flow of faucet.

2.5 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

2.6 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/4.

2. Material: Stainless steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- thick stainless steel tube to wall; and stainless steel wall flange.

2.7 SUPPORTS
A. Type II Lavatory Carrier:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Lavatories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224216.13 - 4
100% Design Submittal
B. Type III Lavatory Carrier:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Lavatories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224216.13 - 5
100% Design Submittal

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION 224216.13
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commercial Lavatories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 224216.13 - 6
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226213 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 226213 - VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Laboratory vacuum piping, designated " laboratory vacuum."

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. HVE: High-volume (oral) evacuation.

B. WAGD: Waste anesthetic gas disposal.

C. Vacuum Piping Systems: Include medical vacuum, WAGD, dental vacuum, HVE, and laboratory vacuum piping systems.

D. Laboratory Vacuum Piping Systems: Include laboratory low-vacuum and laboratory highvacuum piping systems.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or AWS B2.2/B2.2M. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226213 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Laboratory vacuum operating at 12 in. Hg.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFPA 99.

2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with NFPA 99 for medical vacuum piping materials.

B. Copper Water Tube: ASTM B88, Type M, seamless, drawn temper.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or in accordance with CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.

D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.

E. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, full-face type.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1 carbon steel.

F. Shape-Memory-Metal Couplings:

1. Description: Cryogenic compression fitting made of nickel-titanium, shape-memory alloy, and that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service in accordance with CGA G-4.1.

G. Pressure-Seal Fittings:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end.

2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Bronze fitting with stainless steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring seal in each end.

H. Extruded-Tee Outlets: ASTM F2014 procedure for making branch outlets in copper tube.

I. Flexible Pipe Connectors:

1. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
a. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.
b. End Connections: Plain-end copper tube.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226213 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux in accordance with ASTM B813.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.

C. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.

2.5 VALVES
A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged in accordance with CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.

1. Exception: Factory cleaning and bagging are not required for valves for WAGD service.

B. Zone-Valve Box Assemblies: Box with medical gas valves, tube extensions, and gages.

1. Zone-Valve Boxes:
a. Steel Box with Aluminum Cover:
b. Steel Box with Stainless Steel Cover:
c. Description: Formed-steel box with cover, anchors for recessed mounting, holes with grommets in box sides for tubing extension protection, and of size for single or multiple valves with pressure gages and in sizes required to permit manual operation of valves.
1) Interior Finish: Factory-applied white enamel.
2) Cover Plate: stainless steel with frangible or removable windows. 3) Valve-Box Windows: Clear or tinted transparent plastic with labeling that includes rooms served, in accordance with NFPA 99.

C. Ball Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110.

2. Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze.

3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.

4. Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass.

5. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

6. Handle: Lever type with locking device.

7. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal.

8. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions and manufacturerinstalled ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gauge on one copper-tube extension.

D. Check Valves:

1. Description: In-line pattern, bronze.

2. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226213 - 4
100% Design Submittal

3. Operation: Spring loaded.

4. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Location and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of vacuum piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, vacuum producer sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of vacuum piping.

C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than piping pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where vacuum piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.

J. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.

K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections. Extruded-tee branch outlets in copper tubing may be made where specified.

N. Install medical vacuum piping from medical vacuum service connections specified in this Section, to equipment specified in Section 226219 "Vacuum Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities," and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical vacuum service.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226213 - 5
100% Design Submittal
O. Piping Restraint Installation: Install seismic restraints on vacuum piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
P. Install vacuum service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.

Q. Install vacuum bottle bracket adjacent to each wall-mounted medical vacuum service connection suction inlet.

R. Connect vacuum piping to vacuum producers and to equipment requiring vacuum service.

S. Install unions in copper vacuum tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from vacuum equipment and specialties.

B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of vacuum flow to vacuum-producing equipment.

C. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.

D. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position.

E. Install flexible pipe connectors in suction inlet piping to each vacuum producer.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings in accordance with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," Ch. "Brazed Joints." Do not use flux. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226213 - 6
100% Design Submittal
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux to tube end. Join copper tube and fittings in accordance with ASTM B828.

F. Extruded-Tee Outlets: Form branches in copper tube in accordance with ASTM F2014, with tools recommended by tube manufacturer.

G. Flanged Joints:

1. Copper Tubing: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges.

Join flanges with gasket and bolts in accordance with ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper and copper-alloy fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

I. Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: Join new copper tube to existing tube according to procedures developed by fitting manufacturer for installation of shape-memory-metal coupling joints.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.

2. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.

E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44 pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.

F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52 spring hangers.

G. Install hangers for copper tubing with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters to comply with MSS SP-58, NFPA 99, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

H. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

I. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS SP-58, NFPA 99, locally enforced codes and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226213 - 7
100% Design Submittal

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying labels and devices for laboratory vacuum piping, valves, and specialties.

Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Install identifying labels and devices for medical vacuum piping systems in accordance with NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:

1. Laboratory Vacuum: Black boxed letters on white-and-black checkerboard background.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR LABORATORY FACILITY VACUUM PIPING A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Piping Leak Tests for Vacuum Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping.

Cap and fill vacuum piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.
a. Test Pressure for Copper Tubing: 150 psig.

2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Inspect filters for proper operation.

C. Piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect tubing from damage.

B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.

C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, in accordance with "Preparation" Article.

3.8 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Connect new copper tubing to existing copper tubing with memory-metal couplings.

B. Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226213 - 8
100% Design Submittal
C. Laboratory Vacuum Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Copper medical gas tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

2. NPS 4 and Smaller: Copper medical gas tube, press-type fittings, and pressure-sealed joints.

3. All Sizes: Extruded-tee fittings and brazed joints may be used instead of standard tee fittings.

3.9 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Shutoff Valves:

1. Copper Tubing: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions.

B. Zone Valves: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.

END OF SECTION 226213
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 226313 - GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Helium piping designated “laboratory helium”.

2. Oxygen piping designated “laboratory oxygen”.

3. Ball valves.

4. Check valves.

5. Gas safety valves.

6. Gas-service connections.

7. Ceiling columns.

8. Gas manifolds.

9. Simplex specialty gas manifolds.

10. Duplex specialty gas manifolds.

11. Bulk gas storage tanks.

12. Gas cylinder storage racks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

B. Laboratory gas piping systems include, helium, and oxygen for laboratories.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Source Quality Control Reports:

1. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report for Bulk Gas Storage Tanks: As required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. laboratory helium operating at 50 to 55 psig.

B. laboratory oxygen operating at 50 to 55 psig.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Ensure gas manifolds and bulk gas storage tanks withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the gas manifolds and bulk gas storage tanks will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the manifolds and tanks will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.

B. Comply with NFPA 55.

C. Comply with NFPA 99.

2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. For all laboratory gases, verify all positive-pressure laboratory gas piping, tubing, and fittings have been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service, in accordance with CGA G-4.1.

1. Deliver each length of tubing plugged or capped by the manufacturer and kept sealed until prepared for installation.

2. Deliver fittings and other components manufacturer sealed and labeled, and kept sealed until prepared for installation.

B. Copper Laboratory Gas Tube: ASTM B819, Type K and Type L, seamless, drawn temper.

Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in green for Type K tube and blue for Type L tube.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type.

D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.

E. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, full-face type.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

F. Shape-Memory-Metal Couplings:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 3
100% Design Submittal

1. Description: Cryogenic compression fitting made of nickel-titanium, shape-memory alloy.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.

B. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.

2.5 VALVES
A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged in accordance with CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.

B. Zone-Valve Box Assemblies: Box with medical gas valves, tube extensions, and gauges.

1. Steel Box with Stainless Steel Cover:
a. Description: Formed-steel box with cover, anchors for recessed mounting, holes with grommets in box sides for tubing extension protection, and of size for single or multiple valves with pressure gauges and in sizes required to permit manual operation of valves.
1) Interior Finish: Factory-applied white enamel.
2) Cover Plate: Stainless steel with frangible or removable windows. 3) Valve-Box Windows: Clear or tinted transparent plastic with labeling that includes rooms served, in accordance with NFPA 99.
b. Verify positive-pressure gas valves, for all medical gas types, are manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service, in accordance with CGA G-4.1. 1) Deliver valves sealed and labeled and kept sealed until prepared for installation.

C. Ball Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110.

2. Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze.

3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.

4. Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass.

5. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

6. Handle: Lever type with locking device.

7. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal.

8. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions and manufacturerinstalled ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gauge on one copper-tube extension.

9. Verify positive-pressure gas valves, for all medical gas types, are manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service, in accordance with CGA G-4.1. a. Deliver valves sealed and labeled and kept sealed until prepared for installation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 4
100% Design Submittal
D. Check Valves:

1. Description: In-line pattern, bronze.

2. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.

3. Operation: Spring loaded.

4. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.

5. Verify positive-pressure gas valves, for all gas types, are manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service, in accordance with CGA G-4.1. a. Deliver valves sealed and labeled and kept sealed until prepared for installation.

E. Emergency Oxygen Connections: Low-pressure oxygen inlet assembly for connection to building oxygen piping systems.

1. Enclosure: Weatherproof hinged locking cover with caption similar to "Emergency LowPressure Gaseous Oxygen Inlet."

2. Inlet: Manufacturer-installed, NPS 1 or NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B819, copper tubing with NPS 1 minimum ball valve.

3. Safety Valve: Bronze-body pressure-relief valve set at 75 or 80 psig.

4. Instrumentation: Pressure gauge.

F. Gas Safety Valves:

1. Bronze body.

2. ASME-construction, poppet, pressure-relief type.

3. Settings to match system requirements.

4. Verify positive-pressure gas valves, for all gas types, are manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service, in accordance with CGA G-4.1. a. Deliver valves sealed and labeled and kept sealed until prepared for installation.

G. Pressure Regulators:

1. Stainless steel body and trim.

2. Spring-loaded, diaphragm-operated, relieving type.

3. Manual pressure-setting adjustment.

4. Rated for 250-psig minimum inlet pressure.

5. Capable of controlling delivered gas pressure within 0.5 psig for each 10-psig inlet pressure.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 5
100% Design Submittal

6. Verify positive pressure gas valves, for all gas types, are manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service, in accordance with CGA G-4.1. a. Deliver valves sealed and labeled and kept sealed until prepared for installation.

2.6 GAS SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. General Requirements for Laboratory Gas-Service Connections:

1. Verify all positive-pressure gas-service connections, for all gas types, are manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed as for oxygen service in accordance with CGA G-4.1.

2. Suitable for specific gas pressure and suction service listed.

3. Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates.

4. Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Roughing-in Assembly:

1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping.

2. Brass-body outlet block with secondary check valve that will prevent gas flow when primary valve is removed.

3. Double seals that will prevent gas leakage.

4. ASTM B819, NPS 3/8 copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking and tubeend dust cap.

C. Finishing Assembly:

1. Brass housing with primary check valve.

2. Double seals that will prevent gas leakage.

3. Cover plate with gas-service label.

D. Quick-Coupler Pressure Service Connections: Outlets for oxygen with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange between services, constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment, and with positive-locking ring that retains equipment stem in valve during use.

E. Cover Plates: One piece, stainless steel and permanent, color-coded, identifying label matching corresponding service.

2.7 GAS MANIFOLDS
A. Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed, for all medical gas type, for oxygen service in accordance with CGA G-4.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for high-pressure medical gas cylinders.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 6
100% Design Submittal
D. Central Control-Panel Unit:

1. Weatherproof cabinet.

2. Supply and delivery pressure gauges.

3. Electrical alarm-system connections and transformer.

4. Indicator lights or devices.

5. Manifold connection.

6. Pressure changeover switch.

7. Line-pressure regulator.

8. Shutoff valves.

9. Safety valve.

E. Manifold and Headers:

1. Duplex, nonferrous-metal header for number of cylinders indicated, divided into two equal banks.

2. Designed for 2000-psig minimum inlet pressure, except nitrous oxide manifolds may be designed for 800 psig, and carbon dioxide manifolds may be designed for 1500 psig.

3. Cylinder-bank headers with inlet (pigtail) connections complying with CGA V-1.

4. Individual inlet check valves, shutoff valve, pressure regulator, check valve, and pressure gauge.

F. Operation: Automatic, pressure-switch-activated changeover from one-cylinder bank to the other when first bank becomes exhausted, without line-pressure fluctuation or resetting of regulators and without supply interruption by shutoff of either cylinder-bank header.

G. Mounting: Wall with mounting brackets for manifold control cabinet and headers or floor with support legs for manifold control cabinet.

H. Label manifold control unit with permanent label identifying medical gas type and system operating pressure.

I. Laboratory Helium Manifolds: For four cylinders and 55-psig line pressure.

J. Laboratory Oxygen Manifolds: For 12 cylinders and 55-psig line pressure.

2.8 SIMPLEX SPECIALTY GAS MANIFOLDS
A. Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed, for all medical gas type, for oxygen service in accordance with CGA G-4.1.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Control-Panel Unit: Weatherproof cabinet, supply and delivery pressure gauges, electrical alarm-system connections and transformer, indicator lights or devices, manifold connection, line-pressure regulator, shutoff valves, and safety valve.

D. Manifold and Header: Nonferrous-metal header for number of cylinders indicated. Units include design for 2000-psig minimum inlet pressure, cylinder-bank header with inlet (pigtail) ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 7
100% Design Submittal
connections complying with CGA V-1, individual inlet check valves, shutoff valve, pressure regulator, check valve, and pressure gauge.

E. Mounting: Wall with mounting brackets for manifold control cabinet and header or floor with support legs for manifold control cabinet.

F. Label manifold control unit with permanent label identifying specialty gas type and system operating pressure.

2.9 DUPLEX SPECIALTY GAS MANIFOLDS
A. Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed, for all gas types, for oxygen service in accordance with CGA G-4.1.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Central Control-Panel Unit: Weatherproof cabinet, supply and delivery pressure gauges, electrical alarm-system connections and transformer, indicator lights or devices, manifold connection, line-pressure regulator, shutoff valves, and safety valve.

D. Manifold and Headers: Duplex, nonferrous-metal header for number of cylinders indicated, divided into two equal banks. Units include design for 2000-psig minimum inlet pressure, cylinder-bank headers with inlet (pigtail) connections complying with CGA V-1, individual inlet check valves, shutoff valve, pressure regulator, check valve, and pressure gauge.

E. Operation: Automatic, pressure-switch-activated changeover from one-cylinder bank to the other when first bank becomes exhausted, without line-pressure fluctuation or resetting of regulators and without supply interruption by shutoff of either cylinder-bank header.

F. Mounting: Wall with mounting brackets for manifold control cabinet and headers or floor with support legs for manifold control cabinet.

G. Label manifold control unit with permanent label identifying specialty gas type and system operating pressure.

2.10 GAS CYLINDER STORAGE RACKS
A. Wall Storage Racks: Fabricate racks with chain restraints for upright cylinders as indicated or provide equivalent manufactured wall racks.

B. Freestanding Storage Racks: Fabricate racks as indicated or provide equivalent manufactured storage racks.

C. Anchor holes in base to permit securing to the floor with anchor bolts supplied by the manufacturer.

D. Rack Support Tubing: Minimum 2-inch by 2-inch by 1/8-inch E. Tank Restraints: Dual minimum 5/16-inch 1,900 pounds 5/16-inch 520 pounds. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 8
100% Design Submittal
F. Comply with NFPA 55.

G. Comply with NFPA 99.

H. Comply with OSHPD #OPA-2878-10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Location and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of gas piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of medical gas piping.

C. Comply with NFPA 55 for installation of laboratory gas piping.

D. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

J. Install piping free of sags and bends.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.

L. Install medical gas piping to medical gas-service connections specified in this Section, to medical gas-service connections in equipment specified in this Section, and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical gas service.

M. Install exterior, buried medical gas piping in protective conduit fabricated with PVC pipe and fittings. Do not extend conduit through foundation wall. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 9
100% Design Submittal
N. Piping Restraint Installation: Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
O. Install medical gas-service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.

P. Connect gas piping to gas sources and to gas outlets and equipment requiring gas service.

Q. Install unions in copper tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each specialty and piece of equipment.

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to gas laboratory and healthcare equipment and specialties.

B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of gas flow from laboratory and healthcare gas supplies.

C. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.

D. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Arrange valves so largest valve is lowest. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position.

E. Install pressure regulators on gas piping where reduced pressure is required.

F. Install emergency oxygen connection with pressure-relief valve and full-size discharge piping to outside, with check valve downstream from pressure-relief valve, and with ball valve and check valve in supply main from bulk oxygen storage tank.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 10
100% Design Submittal
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings in accordance with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," Ch. "Brazed Joints." Do not use flux. Continuously purge joint with oil-free, dry nitrogen during brazing.

E. Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: Join new copper tube to existing tube according to procedures developed by fitting manufacturer for installation of shape-memory-metal coupling joints.

F. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux to tube end. Join copper tube and fittings in accordance with ASTM B828.

G. Extruded-Tee Outlets: Form branches in copper tube in accordance with ASTM F2014, with tools recommended by tube manufacturer.

H. Flanged Joints:

1. Copper Tubing: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges.

Join flanges with gasket and bolts in accordance with ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

3.4 GAS-SERVICE COMPONENT INSTALLATION
A. Assemble patient-service console with service connections. Install with supplies concealed in walls. Attach console box or mounting bracket to substrate.

B. Install nitrogen pressure-control panels in walls. Attach to substrate.

C. Assemble ceiling columns and install anchored to substrate. Provide structural steel, hanger rods, anchors, and fasteners in addition to components furnished with specialties necessary to fabricate supports.

D. Assemble ceiling-hose assemblies and install anchored to substrate. Provide structural steel, hanger rods, anchors, and fasteners in addition to components furnished with specialties necessary to fabricate supports.

E. Install gas manifolds anchored to substrate.

F. Install gas cylinders and connect to manifold piping.

G. Install gas manifolds with seismic restraints.

H. Install bulk gas storage tanks and reserve supply tanks level on concrete bases. Set tanks and connect gas piping to tanks in accordance with applicable requirements in NFPA 55 for bulk oxygen storage systems. Install tanks level and plumb, firmly anchored to concrete bases; maintain NFPA 55 and tank manufacturer's recommended clearances. Orient tanks so controls and devices are accessible for servicing.

I. Install bulk gas storage tanks and reserve supply tanks with seismic restraints. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 11
100% Design Submittal

3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANGERs AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.

2. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.

E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.

F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

H. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

I. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS SP-58, NFPA 99, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying labels and devices for specialty gas piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Install identifying labels and devices for healthcare medical gas piping systems in accordance with NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:

1. Carbon Dioxide: Black or white letters on gray background.

2. Helium: White letters on brown background.

3. Nitrogen: White letters on black background.

4. Nitrous Oxide: White letters on blue background.

5. Oxygen: White letters on green background or green letters on white background.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR LABORATORY FACILITY SPECIALTY GAS A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities Renovation & Expansion Final Design 226313 - 12
100% Design Submittal
B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Piping Leak Tests for Specialty Gas Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill specialty gas piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.

2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Inspect specialty gas regulators for proper operation.

C. Piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect tubing from damage.

B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.

C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, in accordance with "Preparation" Article.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain bulk gas storage tanks.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Connect new tubing to existing tubing with memory-metal couplings.

B. Laboratory Gas Piping except Laboratory Nitrogen Piping NPS 3 185 psig: Type L, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.

C. Laboratory Nitrogen Piping NPS 3 185 psig: Type K, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.

3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions.

B. Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.

END OF SECTION 226313
Division 23
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230513 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230513 - 2
100% Design Submittal

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

5. Provide grounding rings or straps on motors with variable frequency controller.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230513 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Verify motors larger than 1/20 hp are one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range.

2.6 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTOR (ECM)
A. Provide pumps so they are specified or scheduled with ECM.

1. Synchronous, constant torque, ECM with permanent magnet rotor. Rotor magnets to be time-stable, nontoxic ceramic magnets (Sr-Fe).

2. Driven by a frequency converter with an integrated power factor correction filter.

Conventional induction motors will not be acceptable.

3. Each motor with an integrated variable-frequency drive, tested as one unit by manufacturer.

4. Motor speed adjustable over full range from 0 rpm to maximum scheduled speed.

5. Variable motor speed to be controlled by a 0- to 10 V-dc or 4- to 20-mA input.

6. Integrated motor protection verified by UL to protect the pump against over- /undervoltage, overtemperature of motor and/or electronics, overcurrent, locked rotor, and dry run (no-load condition).

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 230513
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230513 - 4
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230553 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Duct labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Warning tags.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230553 - 2
100% Design Submittal

5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

6. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

G. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Black.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230553 - 3
100% Design Submittal
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.4 WARNING TAGS
A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.

2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Safety-yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230553 - 4
100% Design Submittal

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

END OF SECTION 230553
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:
a. Motors.

3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.

4. Duct leakage tests.

5. Control system verification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

C. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible, and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 4
100% Design Submittal

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:
a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.
c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. d. Clean filters are installed.
e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete, and safeties are verified. g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. h. Ceilings are installed.
i. Windows and doors are installed.
j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 5
100% Design Submittal

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.
a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.
b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.
d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:
a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 6
100% Design Submittal
d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, fullheating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.

1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.

3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.

4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

4. Mark all final settings.

5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

6. Measure and record all operating data.

7. Record final fan-performance data.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the duct from the fan discharge.

2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control.

3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static pressure and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 7
100% Design Submittal
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows:
a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project.
b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor.
c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units.
d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow.
f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed.
g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure.

5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.
a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.
b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building.
c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.
e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:
a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system.
d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 8
100% Design Submittal
b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow.

8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor.

9. Verify final system conditions as follows:
a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary.
b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. d. Mark final settings.
e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

Measure and record all operating data.
f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Phase and hertz.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.

8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation.

3.8 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS
A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.9 CONTROLS VERIFICATION
A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:

1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.

2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.

4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.

5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 9
100% Design Submittal

6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.

7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.

8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller:
open, closed, or modulating.

9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended temperature, humidity, or pressure.

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information.

3. Check the refrigerant charge.

4. Check the condition of filters.

5. Check the condition of coils.

6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.

7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.

8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.

2. Coils are clean, and fins combed.

3. Drain pans are clean.

4. Fans are clean.

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 10
100% Design Submittal

3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed have priority over the tolerances specified above.

3.12 PROGRESS REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

3.13 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves.

2. Manufacturers' test data.

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Engineer's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 11
100% Design Submittal

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 12
100% Design Submittal

2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.
j. Return airflow in cfm.
k. Outdoor-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft..
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm.
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 13
100% Design Submittal
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btu/h.
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in cfm.
i. Face area in sq. ft..
j. Minimum face velocity in fpm.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Heat output in Btu/h.
b. Airflow rate in cfm.
c. Air velocity in fpm.
d. Entering-air temperature in deg F.
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 14
100% Design Submittal
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches.
f. Duct area in sq. ft..
g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.
j. Actual average velocity in fpm.
k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
e. Make.
f. Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
h. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. ft..

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Air velocity in fpm.
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final airflow rate in cfm.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 15
100% Design Submittal
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Entering-water temperature in deg F.
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
e. Entering-air temperature in deg F.
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

3.14 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT
A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer conduct the inspection in the presence of Engineer.

B. Engineer randomly selects measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked.

Rechecking limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, note the measurements as "FAILED." D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, consider the testing and balancing incomplete and rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230593 - 16
100% Design Submittal

3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION 230593
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

3. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.4 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials are applied.

B. Verify products do not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Ensure products that come in contact with stainless steel have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871.

D. Verify insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel are qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C795.

E. Ensure foam insulation materials do not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 3
100% Design Submittal
F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534, Type II for sheet materials.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type III with factory-applied FSP jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with ASTM C656, Type II, Grade 6. Tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Ensure materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS
A. Verify materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.

D. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and are to be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Ensure materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.

4. Color: Aluminum.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Ensure materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.

4. Color: White.

2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 5
100% Design Submittal

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Jacket:

1. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.

3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 6
100% Design Submittal

4. Elongation: 5 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
b. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 7
100% Design Submittal

5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. b. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, stainless steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. Stainless Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 8
100% Design Submittal

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 9
100% Design Submittal

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 10
100% Design Submittal
E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 11
100% Design Submittal
over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 12
100% Design Submittal

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.8 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Engineer, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.

5. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 13
100% Design Submittal
B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

2. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

3. Flexible connectors.

4. Vibration-control devices.

5. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

6. Return air ductwork located in return air ceiling spaces above the area it serves, except where the return ductwork is installed in ceiling spaces with a roof above.

3.11 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Duct and plenum insulation are one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Provide duct insulation with a minimum R-value of R-8 based on insulation thickness only (excluding air films, vapor retarders, or other duct components) and tested C-values at 75 degrees F mean temperature at the installed thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 or ASTM C177.

END OF SECTION 230713
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Duct Insulation
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230713 - 14
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 230923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems.

2. Delivery of selected control devices to equipment and systems manufacturers for factory installation and to HVAC systems installers for field installation.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets.

4. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors effecting performance.

5. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for each unique product.
a. DDC controllers.
b. Enclosures.
c. Electrical power devices.
d. Accessories.
e. Instruments.
f. Control dampers and actuators.

6. When manufacturer's product datasheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product model, clearly indicate and highlight only applicable information.

7. Each submitted piece of product literature shall clearly cross reference specification and drawings that submittal is to cover.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 2
100% Design Submittal

8. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:
a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve, if included in Project.
b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number. c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system. d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating labels for all wiring terminals.
e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different drawings showing same point.
f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers. g. Narrative sequence of operation.
h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.

9. Control panel drawings indicating the following:
a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and tubing connections.
b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components, cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space. c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend. d. Unique drawing for each panel.

10. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following:
a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements (volts/phase/hertz/ amperes/connection type) listed for each.
b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each. c. Each product requiring power with requirements (volts/phase/hertz/amperes/ connection type) listed for each.
d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each.

11. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:
a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product.

B. System Description:

1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other network devices, and power supplies.

2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and events which initiate generation.

3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to, the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 3
100% Design Submittal
a. Loss of power.
b. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints.
c. Operator workstation failure.
d. Controller failure.
e. Instrument failure.
f. Control damper and valve actuator failure.

4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner.

5. Description of testing plans and procedures.

6. Description of Owner training.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For DDC system to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Include the following:
a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided in electronic PDF format.
b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs.
c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data.
d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer and service representatives for DDC system and products. e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control and changing set points and variables. f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use. g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to:
1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware. 2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration.
3) Debug hardware problems.
4) Repair or replace hardware.
h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language including set points, tuning parameters, and object database. i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media such as DVDs.
j. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers. k. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors. l. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems, custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.
m. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 4
100% Design Submittal
n. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components, including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.
o. Owner training materials.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. DDC System Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of DDC systems and products.

2. DDC systems with similar requirements to those indicated for a continuous period of 10 years within time of bid.

3. DDC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in use on at least five past projects.

4. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, operation and maintenance manuals for all products intended for use.

5. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:
a. Product research and development.
b. Product and application engineering.
c. Product manufacturing, testing and quality control.
d. Technical support for DDC system installation training, commissioning and troubleshooting of installations.
e. Owner operator training.

B. DDC System Provider Qualifications:

1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer.

2. Demonstrate experience with installation of DDC system products being installed for period within five consecutive years before time of bid.

3. Demonstrate experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope and value.

4. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.

5. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to execute work according to schedule.

6. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period.

7. Product parts inventory to support on-going DDC system operation for a period of not less than 5 years after Substantial Completion.

8. DDC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary to comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Adjust, repair, or replace failures at no additional cost or reduction in service to Owner.

2. Include updates or upgrades to software and firmware if necessary to resolve deficiencies.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 5
100% Design Submittal
a. Install updates only after receiving Owner's written authorization.

3. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DDC SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:

1. Distech Controls.

2. Johnson Controls, Inc.

3. Trane.

2.2 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital conversion and program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of predefined conditions.

1. DDC System: Consist of a peer-to-peer network of distributed DDC controllers, operator interfaces, and software.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Products installed in ducts, equipment, and return-air paths shall comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. DDC Data Access:

1. When logged into the system, operator shall be able to also interact with any DDC controller connected to DDC system as required for functional operation of DDC system.

2. System(s) shall be used for application configuration; for archiving, reporting and trending of data; for operator transaction archiving and reporting; for network information management; for alarm annunciation; and for operator interface tasks and controls application management.

C. Input Point Displayed Accuracy: Input point displayed values shall meet following end-to-end overall system accuracy, including errors associated with meter, sensor, transmitter, lead wire or cable, and analog to digital conversion.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 6
100% Design Submittal

1. Flow:
a. Air: Within 2 percent of design flow rate.
b. Air (Terminal Units): Within 5 percent of design flow rate.

2. Pressure:
a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: 0.5 percent of instrument range. b. Space: Within 0.5 percent of instrument range.

3. Speed: Within 5 percent of reading.

4. Temperature, Dry Bulb:
a. Air: Within 0.5-degree F.
b. Space: Within 0.5-degree F.
c. Outdoor: Within 1 degree F.
d. Temperature Difference: Within 0.25-degree F.
e. Other Temperatures Not Indicated: Within 0.5-degree F.

D. Precision of I/O Reported Values: Values reported in database and displayed shall have following precision:

1. Current:
a. Milliamperes: Nearest 1/100th of a milliampere.
b. Amperes: Nearest 1/10th of an ampere up to 100 A; nearest ampere for 100 A and more.

2. Flow:
a. Air: Nearest 1/10th of a cfm through 100 cfm; nearest cfm between 100 and 1000 cfm; nearest 10 cfm between 1000 and 10,000 cfm; nearest 100 cfm above 10,000 cfm.

3. Speed:
a. Rotation (rpm): Nearest 1 rpm.
b. Velocity: Nearest 1/10th fpm through 100 fpm; nearest fpm between 100 and 1000 fpm; nearest 10 fpm above 1000 fpm.

4. Position, Dampers and Valves (Percentage Open): Nearest 1 percent.

5. Pressure:
a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th inch w.c..
b. Space: Nearest 1/100th inch w.c..
c. Steam: Nearest 1/10th psig through 100 psig; nearest psig above 100 psig. d. Water: Nearest 1/10 psig through 100 psig; nearest psig above 100 psig.

6. Temperature:
a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th of a degree. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 7
100% Design Submittal
b. Outdoor: Nearest degree.
c. Space: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.
d. Chilled Water: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.
e. Condenser Water: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.
f. Heating Hot Water: Nearest degree.
g. Heat Recovery Runaround: Nearest 1/10th of a degree. h. Steam: Nearest degree.

7. Voltage: Nearest 1/10 volt up to 100 V; nearest volt above 100 V.

E. Control Stability: Control variables indicated within the following limits:

1. Flow:
a. Air, Ducts and Equipment, except Terminal Units: Within 2 percent of design flow rate.
b. Air, Terminal Units: Within 5 percent of design flow rate.

2. Pressure:
a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: 0.5 percent of instrument range. b. Space: Within 0.5 percent of instrument range.

3. Temperature, Dry Bulb:
a. Air: Within 0.5 degrees F.
b. Space: Within 0.5 degrees F.

F. Electric Power Quality:

1. Power-Line Surges:
a. Protect DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from power-line surges to comply with requirements of IEEE C62.41.
b. Do not use fuses for surge protection.
c. Test protection in the normal mode and in the common mode, using the following two waveforms:
1) 10-by-1000-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1,500 V and a peak current of 60 A.
2) 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1,000 V and a peak current of 500 A.

2. Power Conditioning:
a. Protect DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from irregularities and noise rejection. Characteristics of power-line conditioner shall be as follows:
1) At 85 percent load, output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 1 percent of nominal when input voltage fluctuates between minus 20 percent to plus 10 percent of nominal.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 8
100% Design Submittal
2) During load changes from zero to full load, output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 3 percent of nominal.
3) Accomplish full correction of load switching disturbances within five cycles, and 95 percent correction within two cycles of onset of disturbance. 4) Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 3-1/2 percent at full load.

3. Ground Fault: Protect products from ground fault by providing suitable grounding.

Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition.

G. Backup Power Source:

1. HVAC systems and equipment served by a backup power source shall have associated DDC system products that control such systems and equipment also served from a backup power source.

H. Continuity of Operation after Electric Power Interruption:

1. Equipment and associated factory-installed controls, field-installed controls, electrical equipment, and power supply connected to building normal and backup power systems shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to operating state occurring immediately before loss of normal power, without need for manual intervention by operator when power is restored either through backup power source or through normal power if restored before backup power is brought online.

2.4 PANEL-MOUNTED, MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCHES
A. Manual Override of Control Dampers:

1. Include panel-mounted, two-position, selector switch for each automatic control damper being controlled by DDC controller.

2. Label each switch with damper designation served by switch.

3. Label switch positions to indicate either "Manual" or "Auto" control signal to damper.

4. With switch in "Auto" position signal to control damper actuator shall be control loop output signal from DDC controller.

5. With switch in "Manual" position, signal to damper actuator shall be controlled at panel with either an integral or separate switch to include local control. a. For Binary Control Dampers: Manual two-position switch shall have "Close" and "Open" switch positions indicated. With switch in "Close" position, damper shall close. With switch in "Open" position, damper shall open. b. For Analog Control Dampers: A gradual switch shall have "Close" and "Open" switch limits indicated. Operator shall be able to rotate switch knob to adjust damper to any position from close to open.

6. DDC controller shall monitor and report position of each manual override selector switch. With switch placed in "manual" position, DDC controller shall signal an override condition to alert operator that damper is under manual, not automatic, control.

7. Configure manual override switches to allow operator to manually operate damper while at panel without DDC controller installed and operational. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 9
100% Design Submittal

8. Terminal equipment including VAV units, do not require manual override unless otherwise indicated by sequence of operation.

2.5 DDC SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES
A. Operator Means of System Access: Operator shall be able to access entire DDC system through any of multiple means, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Desktop and portable workstation with hardwired connection through LAN port.

2. Portable operator terminal with hardwired connection through LAN port.

3. Portable operator workstation with wireless connection through LAN router.

4. Mobile device and application with secured wireless connection through LAN router or cellular data service.

5. Remote connection through web access.

B. Access to system, regardless of operator means used, shall be transparent to operator.

C. Portable Workstations:

1. Connect to DDC system Level one LAN through a communications port directly on LAN or through a communications port on a DDC controller.

2. Able to communicate with any device located on any DDC system LAN.

3. Connect to system through a wireless router connected to Level one LAN.

4. Connect to system through a cellular data service.

5. Portable workstation shall be able to communicate with any device connected to any system LAN regardless of point of physical connection to system.

6. Monitor, program, schedule, adjust set points, and report capabilities of I/O connected anywhere in system.

7. Have dynamic graphic displays that are identical to desktop workstations.

D. Critical Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator-selected critical alarms shall be sent by DDC system to notify operator of critical alarms that require immediate attention.

2. DDC system shall send alarm notification to multiple recipients that are assigned for each alarm.

3. DDC system shall notify recipients by any or all means, including e-mail, text message and prerecorded phone message to mobile and landline phone numbers.

2.6 PORTABLE WORKSTATIONS
A. Description: A self-contained computer designed to allow for normal use in different locations and conditions.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Performance requirements may dictate equipment exceeding minimum requirements indicated.

2. Energy Star compliant.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 10
100% Design Submittal

3. Hardware and software shall support local down-loading to DDC controllers.

4. Data transfer rate to DDC controller shall be at network speed.

2.7 PORTABLE OPERATOR TERMINAL
A. Description: Handheld device with integral keypad or touch screen operator interface.

B. Display: Multiple lines of text display for use in operator interaction with DDC system.

C. Cable: Flexible cable, at least 36 inches long, with a plug-in jack for connection to DDC controllers, network ports or instruments with an integral LAN port. As an alternative to hardwired connection, POT shall be accessible to DDC controllers through a wireless network connection.

D. POT shall be powered through network connection.

E. Connection of POT to DDC system shall not interrupt or interfere with normal network operation in any way, prevent alarms from being transmitted, or preclude central initiated commands and system modification.

F. POT shall give operator the ability to do the following:

1. Display and monitor BI point status.

2. Change BO point set point (on or off, open or closed).

3. Display and monitor analog point values.

4. Change analog control set points.

5. Command a setting of AO point.

6. Display and monitor I/O point in alarm.

7. Add a new or delete an existing I/O point.

8. Enable and disable I/O points, initiators, and programs.

9. Display and change time and date.

10. Display and change time schedules.

11. Display and change run-time counters and run-time limits.

12. Display and change time and event initiation.

13. Display and change control application and DDC parameters.

14. Display and change programmable offset values.

15. Access DDC controller initialization routines and diagnostics.

2.8 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. System Software Minimum Requirements:

1. Real-time multitasking and multiuser 64-bit operating system that allows concurrent multiple operator workstations operating and concurrent execution of multiple real-time programs and custom program development.

2. Operating system shall be capable of operating DOS and Microsoft Windows applications.

3. Database management software shall manage all data on an integrated and non-redundant basis. Additions and deletions to database shall be without detriment to existing data. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 11
100% Design Submittal
Include cross linkages so no data required by a program can be deleted by an operator until that data have been deleted from respective programs.

4. Network communications software shall manage and control multiple network communications to provide exchange of global information and execution of global programs.

5. Operator interface software shall include day-to-day operator transaction processing, alarm and report handling, operator privilege level and data segregation control, custom programming, and online data modification capability.

6. Scheduling software shall schedule centrally based time and event, temporary, and exception day programs.

B. Operator Interface Software:

1. Minimize operator training through use of English language prorating and English language point identification.

2. Minimize use of a typewriter-style keyboard through use of a pointing device similar to a mouse.

3. Operator sign-off shall be a manual operation or, if no keyboard or mouse activity takes place, an automatic sign-off.

4. Automatic sign-off period shall be programmable from one to 60 minutes in one-minute increments on a per operator basis.

5. Operator sign-on and sign-off activity shall be recorded and sent to printer.

6. Security Access:
a. Operator access to DDC system shall be under password control. b. An alphanumeric password shall be field assignable to each operator. c. Operators shall be able to access DDC system by entry of proper password. d. Operator password shall be same regardless of which computer or other interface means is used.
e. Additions or changes made to passwords shall be updated automatically. f. Each operator shall be assigned an access level to restrict access to data and functions the operator is cable of performing.
g. Software shall have at least five access levels.
h. Each menu item shall be assigned an access level so that a one-for-one correspondence between operator assigned access level(s) and menu item access level(s) is required to gain access to menu item.
i. Display menu items to operator with those capable of access highlighted. Menu and operator access level assignments shall be online programmable and under password control.

7. Data Segregation:
a. Include data segregation for control of specific data routed to a workstation, to an operator or to a specific output device, such as a printer. b. Include at least 32 segregation groups.
c. Segregation groups shall be selectable such as "fire points," "fire points on second floor," "space temperature points," "HVAC points," and so on. d. Points shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups. Display and output of data to printer or monitor shall occur where there is a match of operator or peripheral segregation group assignment and point segregations. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 12
100% Design Submittal
e. Alarms shall be displayed and printed at each peripheral to which segregation allows, but only those operators assigned to peripheral and having proper authorization level will be allowed to acknowledge alarms. f. Operators and peripherals shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups and all assignments are to be online programmable and under password control.

8. Operators shall be able to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Start or stop selected equipment.
b. Adjust set points.
c. Add, modify, and delete time programming.
d. Enable and disable process execution.
e. Lock and unlock alarm reporting for each point.
f. Enable and disable totalization for each point.
g. Enable and disable trending for each point.
h. Override control loop set points.
i. Enter temporary override schedules.
j. Define holiday schedules.
k. Change time and date.
l. Enter and modify analog alarm limits.
m. Enter and modify analog warning limits.
n. View limits.
o. Enable and disable demand limiting.
p. Enable and disable duty cycle.
q. Display logic programming for each control sequence.

9. Reporting:
a. Generated automatically and manually.
b. Sent to displays, printers and disk files.
c. Types of Reporting:
1) General listing of points.
2) List points currently in alarm.
3) List of off-line points.
4) List points currently in override status.
5) List of disabled points.
6) List points currently locked out.
7) List of items defined in a "Follow-Up" file.
8) List weekly schedules.
9) List holiday programming.
10) List of limits and deadbands.

10. Summaries: For specific points, for a logical point group, for an operator selected group(s), or for entire system without restriction due to hardware configuration.

C. Graphic Interface Software:

1. Include a full interactive graphical selection means of accessing and displaying system data to operator. Include at least five levels with the penetration path operator assignable (for example, site, building, floor, air-handling unit, and supply temperature loop). Native ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 13
100% Design Submittal
language descriptors assigned to menu items are to be operator defined and modifiable under password control.

2. Include a hierarchical-linked dynamic graphic operator interface for accessing and displaying system data and commanding and modifying equipment operation. Interface shall use a pointing device with pull-down or penetrating menus, color and animation to facilitate operator understanding of system.

3. Include at least 10 levels of graphic penetration with the hierarchy operator assignable.

4. Descriptors for graphics, points, alarms and such shall be modified through operator's workstation under password control.

5. Graphic displays shall be online user definable and modifiable using the hardware and software provided.

6. Data to be displayed within a graphic shall be assignable regardless of physical hardware address, communication or point type.

7. Graphics are to be online programmable and under password control.

8. Points may be assignable to multiple graphics where necessary to facilitate operator understanding of system operation.

9. Graphics shall also contain software points.

10. Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic name as graphics are selected to facilitate operator understanding.

11. Back-trace feature shall permit operator to move upward in the hierarchy using a pointing device. Back trace shall show all previous penetration levels. Include operator with option of showing each graphic full screen size with back trace as horizontal header or by showing a "stack" of graphics, each with a back trace.

12. Display operator accessed data on the monitor.

13. Operator shall select further penetration using pointing device to click on a site, building, floor, area, equipment, and so on. Defined and linked graphic below that selection shall then be displayed.

14. Include operator with means to directly access graphics without going through penetration path.

15. Dynamic data shall be assignable to graphics.

16. Display points (physical and software) with dynamic data provided by DDC system with appropriate text descriptors, status or value, and engineering unit.

17. Use color, rotation, or other highly visible means, to denote status and alarm states. Color shall be variable for each class of points, as chosen by operator.

18. Points shall be dynamic with operator adjustable update rates on a per point basis from one second to over a minute.

19. For operators with appropriate privilege, points shall be commanded directly from display using pointing device.
a. For an analog command point such as set point, current conditions and limits shall be displayed and operator can position new set point using pointing device. b. For a digital command point such as valve position, valve shall show its current state such as open or closed and operator could select alternative position using pointing device.
c. Keyboard equivalent shall be available for those operators with that preference.

20. Operator shall be able to split or resize viewing screen into quadrants to show one graphic on one quadrant of screen and other graphics or spreadsheet, bar chart, word processing, curve plot and other information on other quadrants on screen. This feature shall allow real-time monitoring of one part of system while displaying other parts of system or data to better facilitate overall system operation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 14
100% Design Submittal

21. Help Features:
a. On-line context-sensitive help utility to facilitate operator training and understanding.
b. Bridge to further explanation of selected keywords. Document shall contain text and graphics to clarify system operation.
1) If help feature does not have ability to bridge on keywords for more information, a complete set of user manuals shall be provided in an indexed word-processing program, which shall run concurrently with operating system software.
c. Available for Every Menu Item:
1) Index items for each system menu item.

22. Graphic generation software shall allow operator to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.
a. Include libraries of symbols depicting HVAC symbols such as fans, coils, filters, dampers, valves pumps, and electrical symbols.
b. Graphic development package shall use a pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow operator to perform the following:
1) Define background screens.
2) Define connecting lines and curves.
3) Locate, orient and size descriptive text.
4) Define and display colors for all elements.
5) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other displays.

D. Project-Specific Graphics: Graphics documentation including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Site plan showing each building, and additional site elements, which are being controlled or monitored by DDC system.

2. Plan for each building floor, including interstitial floors, and each roof level of each building, showing the following:
a. Room layouts with room identification and name.
b. Locations and identification of all monitored and controlled HVAC equipment and other equipment being monitored and controlled by DDC system. c. Location and identification of each hardware point being controlled or monitored by DDC system.

3. Control schematic for each of following, including a graphic system schematic representation with point identification, set point and dynamic value indication, sequence of operation and control logic diagram.

4. Graphic display for each piece of equipment connected to DDC system through a data communications link. Include dynamic indication of all points associated with equipment. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 15
100% Design Submittal
E. Customizing Software:

1. Software to modify and tailor DDC system to specific and unique requirements of equipment installed, to programs implemented and to staffing and operational practices planned.

2. Online modification of DDC system configuration, program parameters, and database using menu selection and keyboard entry of data into preformatted display templates.

3. As a minimum, include the following modification capability:
a. Operator assignment shall include designation of operator passwords, access levels, point segregation and auto sign-off.
b. Peripheral assignment capability shall include assignment of segregation groups and operators to consoles and printers, designation of backup workstations and printers, designation of workstation header points and enabling and disabling of print-out of operator changes.
c. System configuration and diagnostic capability shall include communications and peripheral port assignments, DDC controller assignments to network, DDC controller enable and disable, assignment of command trace to points and application programs and initiation of diagnostics.
d. System text addition and change capability shall include English or native language descriptors for points, segregation groups and access levels and action messages for alarms, run time and trouble condition.
e. Time and schedule change capability shall include time and date set, time and occupancy schedules, exception and holiday schedules and daylight savings time schedules.
f. Point related change capability shall include the following:
1) System and point enable and disable.
2) Run-time enable and disable.
3) Assignment of points to segregation groups, calibration tables, lockout, and run time and to a fixed I/O value.
4) Assignment of alarm and warning limits.
g. Application program change capability shall include the following:
1) Enable and disable of software programs.
2) Programming changes.
3) Assignment of comfort limits, global points, time and event initiators, time and event schedules and enable and disable time and event programs.

4. Software shall allow operator to add points, or groups of points, to DDC system and to link them to energy optimization and management programs. Additions and modifications shall be online programmable using operator workstation, downloaded to other network devices and entered into their databases. After verification of point additions and associated program operation, database shall be uploaded and recorded on hard drive and disk for archived record.

5. Include high-level language programming software capability for implementation of custom DDC programs. Software shall include a compiler, linker, and up- and down-load capability.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 16
100% Design Submittal

6. Include a library of DDC algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic and relational operators for implementation of control sequences. Also include, as a minimum, the following:
a. Proportional control (P).
b. Proportional plus integral (PI).
c. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID).
d. Adaptive and intelligent self-learning control.
1) Algorithm shall monitor loop response to output corrections and adjust loop response characteristics according to time constant changes imposed. 2) Algorithm shall operate in a continuous self-learning manner and shall retain in memory a stored record of system dynamics so that on system shut down and restart, learning process starts from where it left off.

7. Fully implemented intrinsic control operators including sequence, reversing, ratio, time delay, time of day, highest select AO, lowest select AO, analog controlled digital output, analog control AO, and digitally controlled AO.

8. Logic operators such as "And," "Or," "Not," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

9. Arithmetic operators such as "Add," "Subtract," "Multiply," "Divide," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

10. Relational operators such as "Equal To," "Not Equal To," "Less Than," "Greater Than," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

F. Alarm Handling Software:

1. Include alarm handling software to report all alarm conditions monitored and transmitted through DDC controllers.

2. Include first in, first out handling of alarms according to alarm priority ranking, with most critical alarms first, and with buffer storage in case of simultaneous and multiple alarms.

3. Alarm handling shall be active at all times to ensure that alarms are processed even if an operator is not currently signed on to DDC system.

4. Alarms display shall include the following:
a. Indication of alarm condition such as "Abnormal Off," "Hi Alarm," and "Low Alarm."
b. "Analog Value" or "Status" group and point identification with native language point descriptor such as "Space Temperature, Building 110, 2nd Floor, Room 212."
c. Discrete per point alarm action message, such as "Call Maintenance Dept. Ext5561." d. Include extended message capability to allow assignment and printing of extended action messages. Capability shall be operator programmable and assignable on a per point basis.

5. Alarms shall be directed to appropriate operator workstations, printers, and individual operators by privilege level and segregation assignments.

6. Send e-mail alarm messages to designated operators.

7. Send e-mail, page, text and voice messages to designated operators for critical alarms. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 17
100% Design Submittal

8. Alarms shall be categorized and processed by class.
a. Class 1:
1) Associated with fire, security and other extremely critical equipment monitoring functions; have alarm, trouble, return to normal, and acknowledge conditions printed and displayed.
2) Unacknowledged alarms to be placed in unacknowledged alarm buffer. 3) All conditions shall cause an audible sound and shall require individual acknowledgment to silence audible sound.
b. Class 2:
1) Critical, but not life-safety related, and processed same as Class 1 alarms, except do not require individual acknowledgment.
2) Acknowledgement may be through a multiple alarm acknowledgment. c. Class 3:
1) General alarms; printed, displayed and placed in unacknowledged alarm buffer queues.
2) Each new alarm received shall cause an audible sound. Audible sound shall be silenced by "acknowledging" alarm or by pressing a "silence" key. 3) Acknowledgement of queued alarms shall be either on an individual basis or through a multiple alarm acknowledgement.
4) Alarms returning to normal condition shall be printed and not cause an audible sound or require acknowledgment.
d. Class 4:
1) Routine maintenance or other types of warning alarms. 2) Alarms to be printed only, with no display, no audible sound and no acknowledgment required.

9. Include an unacknowledged alarm indicator on display to alert operator that there are unacknowledged alarms in system. Operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms on an individual basis or through a multiple alarm acknowledge key, depending on alarm class.

10. To ensure that no alarm records are lost, it shall be possible to assign a backup printer to accept alarms in case of failure of primary printer.

G. Reports and Logs:

1. Include reporting software package that allows operator to select, modify, or create reports using DDC system I/O point data available.

2. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval and date.

3. Report data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC controller, and then uploaded to archive on workstation for historical reporting.

4. Operator shall be able to obtain real-time logs of all I/O points by type or status, such as alarm, point lockout, or normal.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 18
100% Design Submittal

5. Reports and logs shall be stored on workstation hard drives in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications, including spreadsheets and word processing.

6. Reports and logs shall be readily printed and set to be printed either on operator command or at a specific time each day.

H. Standard Reports: Standard DDC system reports shall be provided and operator shall be able to customize reports later.

1. All I/O: With current status and values.

2. Alarm: All current alarms, except those in alarm lockout.

3. Disabled I/O: All I/O points that are disabled.

4. Alarm Lockout I/O: All I/O points in alarm lockout, whether manual or automatic.

5. Alarm Lockout I/O in Alarm: All I/O in alarm lockout that are currently in alarm.

6. Logs:
a. Alarm history.
b. System messages.
c. System events.
d. Trends.

I. Standard Trends:

1. Trend all I/O point present values, set points, and other parameters indicated for trending.

2. Trends shall be associated into groups, and a trend report shall be set up for each group.

3. Trends shall be stored within DDC controller and uploaded to hard drives automatically on reaching 75 of DDC controller buffer limit, or by operator request, or by archiving time schedule.

4. Preset trend intervals for each I/O point after review with Owner.

5. Trend intervals shall be operator selectable from 10 seconds up to 60 minutes. Minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 100 per variable.

6. When drive storage memory is full, most recent data shall overwrite oldest data.

7. Archived and real-time trend data shall be available for viewing numerically and graphically by operators.

J. Custom Trends: Operator shall be able to define a custom trend log for any I/O point in DDC system.

1. Each trend shall include interval, start time, and stop time.

2. Data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC controller, and then uploaded to archive on workstation hard drives.

3. Data shall be retrievable for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.

K. Programming Software:

1. Include programming software to execute sequences of operation indicated.

2. Include programming routines in simple and easy to follow logic with detailed text comments describing what the logic does and how it corresponds to sequence of operation.

3. Programming software shall be any of the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 19
100% Design Submittal
a. Graphic Based: Programming shall use a library of function blocks made from preprogrammed code designed for DDC control systems.
1) Function blocks shall be assembled with interconnection lines that represent to control sequence in a flowchart.
2) Programming tools shall be viewable in real time to show present values and logical results of each function block.
b. Menu Based: Programming shall be done by entering parameters, definitions, conditions, requirements and constraints.
c. Line by Line and Text Based: Programming shall declare variable types such as local, global, real, integer, and so on, at the beginning of the program. Use descriptive comments frequently to describe programming code.

4. Include means for detecting programming errors and testing software control strategies with a simulation tool before implementing in actual control. Simulation tool may be inherent with programming software or as a separate product.

L. Database Management Software:

1. Where a separate SQL database is used for information storage, DDC system shall include database management software that separates database monitoring and managing functions by supporting multiple separate windows.

2. Database secure access shall be accomplished using standard SQL authentication including ability to access data for use outside of DDC system applications.

3. Database management function shall include summarized information on trend, alarm, event, and audit for the following database management actions:
a. Backup.
b. Purge.
c. Restore.

4. Database management software shall support the following:
a. Statistics: Display database server information and trend, alarm, event, and audit information on database.
b. Maintenance: Include method of purging records from trend, alarm, event and audit databases by supporting separate screens for creating a backup before purging, selecting database, and allowing for retention of a selected number of day's data.
c. Backup: Include means to create a database backup file and select a storage location.
d. Restore: Include a restricted means of restoring a database by requiring operator to have proper security level.

5. Database management software shall include information of current database activity, including the following:
a. Ready.
b. Purging record from a database.
c. Action failed.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 20
100% Design Submittal
d. Refreshing statistics.
e. Restoring database.
f. Shrinking a database.
g. Backing up a database.
h. Resetting Internet information services.
i. Starting network device manager.
j. Shutting down the network device manager.
k. Action successful.

6. Database management software monitoring functions shall continuously read database information once operator has logged on.

7. Include operator notification through on-screen pop-up display and e-mail message when database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.

8. Monitoring settings window shall have the following sections:
a. Allow operator to set and review scan intervals and start times. b. E-mail: Allow operator to create and review e-mail and phone text messages to be delivered when a warning or an alarm is generated.
c. Warning: Allow operator to define warning limit parameters, set reminder frequency and link e-mail message.
d. Alarm: Allow operator to define alarm limit parameters, set reminder frequency and link e-mail message.
e. Database Login: Protect system from unauthorized database manipulation by creating a read access and a write access for each of trend, alarm, event and audit databases as well as operator proper security access to restore a database.

9. Monitoring settings taskbar shall include the following informational icons:
a. Normal: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that all databases are within their limits.
b. Warning: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that one or more databases have exceeded their warning limit.
c. Alarm: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that one or more databases have exceeded their alarm limit.

2.9 DDC CONTROLLERS
A. DDC system shall consist of a combination of network controllers, programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers to satisfy performance requirements indicated.

B. DDC controllers shall perform monitoring, control, energy optimization and other requirements indicated.

C. DDC controllers shall use a multitasking, multiuser, real-time digital control microprocessor with a distributed network database and intelligence.

D. Each DDC controller shall be capable of full and complete operation as a completely independent unit and as a part of a DDC system wide distributed network. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 21
100% Design Submittal
E. Environment Requirements:

1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

2. Controllers located in conditioned space shall be rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F.

3. Controllers located outdoors shall be rated for operation at 20 to 150 degrees F.

F. Power and Noise Immunity:

1. Controller shall operate at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.

2. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios with up to 5 W of power located within 36 inches of enclosure.

G. DDC Controller Spare Processing Capacity:

1. Include spare processing memory for each controller. RAM, PROM, or EEPROM will implement requirements indicated with the following spare memory:
a. Programmable Application Controllers: Not less than 60 percent. b. Application-Specific Controllers: Not less than 70 percent.

2. Memory shall support DDC controller's operating system and database and shall include the following:
a. Monitoring and control.
b. Energy management, operation and optimization applications. c. Alarm management.
d. Historical trend data of all connected I/O points.
e. Maintenance applications.
f. Operator interfaces.
g. Monitoring of manual overrides.

H. DDC Controller Spare I/O Point Capacity: Include spare I/O point capacity for each controller as follows:

1. Programmable Application Controllers:
a. 20 percent of each AI, AO, BI, and BO point connected to controller. b. Minimum Spare I/O Points per Controller:
1) AIs: Three.
2) AOs: Three.
3) BIs: Five.
4) BOs: Five.

2. Application-Specific Controllers:
a. 10 percent of each AI, AO, BI, and BO point connected to controller. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 22
100% Design Submittal
b. Minimum Spare I/O Points per Controller:
1) AIs: Two.
2) AOs: Two.
3) BIs: Two.
4) BOs: Two.

I. Input and Output Point Interface:

1. Hardwired input and output points shall connect to network, programmable application and application-specific controllers.

2. Input and output points shall be protected so shorting of point to itself, to another point, or to ground will not damage controller.

3. Input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration so that contact will not damage controller.

4. AIs:
a. AIs shall include monitoring of low-voltage (zero- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA) and resistance signals from thermistor and RTD sensors. b. AIs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to, sensor and transmitters installed.
c. Controller AIs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution of 12 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements indicated.
d. Signal conditioning including transient rejection shall be provided for each AI. e. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span. f. Incorporate common-mode noise rejection of at least 50 dB from zero to 100 Hz for differential inputs, and normal-mode noise rejection of at least 20 dB at 60 Hz from a source impedance of 10000 ohms.

5. AOs:
a. Controller AOs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution of 12 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements indicated.
b. Output signals shall have a range of 4 to 20 mA dc or zero- to 10-V dc as required to include proper control of output device.
c. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span. d. AOs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year.

6. BIs:
a. Controller BIs shall accept contact closures and shall ignore transients of less than 5-ms duration.
b. Isolation and protection against an applied steady-state voltage of up to 180-V ac peak.
c. BIs shall include a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.
d. BIs shall sense "dry contact" closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) being applied.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 23
100% Design Submittal
e. Pulse accumulation input points shall comply with all requirements of BIs and accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation. Buffer shall be provided to totalize pulses. Pulse accumulator shall accept rates of at least 20 pulses per second. The totalized value shall be reset to zero on operator's command.

7. BOs:
a. Controller BOs shall include relay contact closures or triac outputs for momentary and maintained operation of output devices.
1) Relay contact closures shall have a minimum duration of 0.1 second. Relays shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Electromagnetic interference suppression shall be provided on all output lines to limit transients to nondamaging levels. Minimum contact rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac. 2) Triac outputs shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Minimum contact rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.
b. BOs shall include for two-state operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulsewidth modulation control. c. BOs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation. d. Include tristate outputs (two coordinated BOs) for control of three-point floatingtype electronic actuators without feedback. e. Limit use of three-point floating devices to VAV terminal unit control applications,. Control algorithms shall operate actuator to one end of its stroke once every 12 hours for verification of operator tracking.

2.10 PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
A. General Programmable Application Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated.

2. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements.

3. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.

4. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms.

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

6. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.

7. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Programmable application controllers shall communicate with other devices on network.

C. Operator Interface:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 24
100% Design Submittal

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation or mobile device.

2. Local Keypad and Display:
a. Equip controller with local keypad and digital display for interrogating and editing data.
b. Use of keypad and display shall require security password.

D. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor.

2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

2.11 APPLICATION-SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
A. Description: Microprocessor-based controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. Controllers are not fully user-programmable but are configurable and customizable for operation of equipment they are designed to control.

1. Capable of standalone operation and shall continue to include control functions without being connected to network.

2. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.

B. Communication: Application-specific controllers shall communicate with other applicationspecific controller and devices on network, and to programmable application and network controllers.

C. Operator Interface: Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation. Connection shall extend to port on space temperature sensor that is connected to controller.

D. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor.

2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

3. Controller shall use nonvolatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in event of power loss.

2.12 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
A. General Controller Software Requirements:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 25
100% Design Submittal

1. Software applications shall reside and operate in controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at operator workstations.

2. I/O points shall be identified by up to 30-character point name and up to 16-character point descriptor. Same names shall be used at operator workstations.

3. Control functions shall be executed within controllers using DDC algorithms.

4. Controllers shall be configured to use stored default values to ensure fail-safe operation.

Default values shall be used when there is a failure of a connected input instrument or loss of communication of a global point value.

B. Security:

1. Operator access shall be secured using individual security passwords and usernames.

2. Passwords shall restrict operator to points, applications, and system functions as assigned by system manager.

3. Operator log-on and log-off attempts shall be recorded.

4. System shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off after last keystroke. The delay time shall be operator-definable.

C. Scheduling: Include capability to schedule each point or group of points in system. Each schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Weekly Schedule:
a. Include separate schedules for each day of week.
b. Each schedule should include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer.
c. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events.
d. When a group of objects are scheduled together, include capability to adjust start and stop times for each member.

2. Exception Schedules:
a. Include ability for operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule.
b. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed, it will be discarded and replaced by regular schedule for that day of week.

3. Holiday Schedules:
a. Include capability for operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. b. Schedules may be placed on scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. c. Operator shall be able to define length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination:

1. Include standard application for proper coordination of equipment.

2. Application shall include operator with a method of grouping together equipment based on function and location.

3. Group may then be used for scheduling and other applications. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 26
100% Design Submittal
E. Binary Alarms:

1. Each binary point shall be set to alarm based on operator-specified state.

2. Include capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms:

1. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits.

2. Alarming shall be able to be automatically and manually disabled.

G. Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator shall be able to determine action to be taken in event of an alarm.

2. Alarms shall be routed to appropriate operator workstations based on time and other conditions.

3. Alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in event log, generate custom messages, and display graphics.

H. Remote Communication:

1. System shall have ability to dial out in the event of an alarm.

I. Maintenance Management: System shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based on operator-designated run-time, starts, and calendar date limits.

J. Sequencing: Include application software based on sequences of operation indicated to properly sequence chillers, boilers, and other applicable HVAC equipment.

K. Control Loops:

1. Support any of the following control loops, as applicable to control required:
a. Two-position (on/off, open/close, slow/fast) control. b. Proportional control.
c. Proportional plus integral (PI) control.
d. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control. 1) Include PID algorithms with direct or reverse action and anti-windup. 2) Algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an output or stage a series of outputs.
3) Controlled variable, set point, and PID gains shall be operator-selectable. e. Adaptive (automatic tuning).

L. Staggered Start: Application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. Order which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts, shall be operator-selectable.

M. Anti-Short Cycling:

1. BO points shall be protected from short cycling.

2. Feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 27
100% Design Submittal
N. On and Off Control with Differential:

1. Include an algorithm that allows a BO to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set point.

2. Algorithm shall be direct- or reverse-acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.

O. Run-Time Totalization:

1. Include software to totalize run-times for all BI and BO points.

2. A high run-time alarm shall be assigned, if required, by operator.

2.13 ELECTRICAL POWER DEVICES
A. Transformers:

1. Transformer shall be sized for the total connected load, plus an additional 25 percent of connected load.

2. Transformer shall have both primary and secondary fuses.

B. DC Power Supply:

1. Plug-in style suitable for mating with a standard eight-pin octal socket. Include the power supply with a mating mounting socket.

2. Enclose circuitry in a housing.

3. Include both line and load regulation to ensure a stable output. To protect both the power supply and the load, power supply shall have an automatic current limiting circuit.

4. Performance:
a. Output voltage nominally 25-V dc within 5 percent.
b. Output current up to 100 mA.
c. Input voltage nominally 120-V ac, 60 Hz.
d. Load regulation within 0.5 percent from zero- to 100-mA load. e. Line regulation within 0.5 percent at a 100-mA load for a 10 percent line change. f. Stability within 0.1 percent of rated volts for 24 hours after a 20-minute warmup.

2.14 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire: Single conductor control wiring above 24 V.

1. Wire size shall be at least No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductor shall be 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall be 600 V, Type THWN or Type THHN, and 90 degrees C according to UL 83.

4. Conductor colors shall be black (hot), white (neutral), and green (ground).

5. Furnish wire on spools.

B. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable above 24 V:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 28
100% Design Submittal

3. Conductor insulation shall have a Type THHN/THWN or Type TFN rating.

4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 0.35/0.5-mil aluminum/Mylar tape, helically applied with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire.

5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 600-V, 90-degrees C rating and shall be Type TC cable.

6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor colors shall be black, red and white.

7. Furnish wire on spools.

C. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable 24 V and Less:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper stranding with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall have a nominal 15-mil thickness, constructed from flameretardant PVC.

4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 1.35-mil aluminum/polymer tape, helically applied with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire.

5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 300-V, 105-degrees C rating and shall be Type PLTC cable.

6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor colors shall be black, red and white.

7. Furnish wire on spools.

2.15 ACCESSORIES
A. Damper Blade Limit Switches:

1. Sense positive open and/or closed position of the damper blades.

2. NEMA 250, Type 13, oil-tight construction.

3. Arrange for the mounting application.

4. Additional waterproof enclosure when required by its environment.

5. Arrange to prevent "over-center" operation.

2.16 IDENTIFICATION
A. Control Equipment, Instruments, and Control Devices:

1. Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign bearing unique identification. a. Include instruments with unique identification identified by equipment being controlled or monitored, followed by point identification.

2. Legend shall consist of white lettering on black background.

3. Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign shall be engraved phenolic consisting of three layers of rigid laminate. Top and bottom layers are color-coded black with contrasting white center exposed by engraving through outer layer and shall be fastened with drive pins.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 29
100% Design Submittal

4. Instruments, control devices and actuators with Project-specific identification tags having unique identification numbers following requirements indicated and provided by original manufacturer do not require additional identification.

B. Raceway and Boxes:

1. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Paint cover plates on junction boxes and conduit same color as the tape banding for conduits. After painting, label cover plate "HVAC Controls," using an engraved phenolic tag.

3. For raceways housing pneumatic tubing, add a phenolic tag labeled "HVAC Instrument Air Tubing."

4. For raceways housing air signal tubing, add a phenolic tag labeled "HVAC Air Signal Tubing."
C. Equipment Warning Labels:

1. Self-adhesive label with pressure-sensitive adhesive back and peel-off protective jacket.

2. Lettering size shall be at least 14-point type with white lettering on red background.

3. Warning label shall read "CAUTION-Equipment operated under remote automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch electric power disconnecting means to OFF position before servicing."

4. Lettering shall be enclosed in a white line border. Edge of label shall extend at least 0.25 inch beyond white border.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.

B. Examine roughing-in for products to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

1. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where product will be installed.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 30
100% Design Submittal

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. If codes and referenced standards are more stringent than requirements indicated, comply with requirements in codes and referenced standards.

D. Fabricate openings and install sleeves in ceilings, floors, roof, and walls required by installation of products. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, and cutting, check for concealed work to avoid damage. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

E. Seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
F. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that damage surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening fasteners.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

G. If product locations are not indicated, install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit service and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks without removal of permanently installed furniture and equipment.

H. Corrosive Environments:

1. Avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive airstreams and environments, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Laboratory exhaust-air streams.
b. Process exhaust-air streams.

2. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive airstream and environment, use Type 316 stainless-steel conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings that are coated with a corrosiveresistant coating that is suitable for environment. Comply with requirements for installation of raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3. Where instruments are located in a corrosive airstream and are not corrosive resistant from manufacturer, field install products in NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

3.3 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
A. Install controllers in enclosures to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Connect controllers to field power supply.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 31
100% Design Submittal
C. Install controller with latest version of applicable software and configure to execute requirements indicated.

D. Test and adjust controllers to verify operation of connected I/O to achieve performance indicated requirements while executing sequences of operation.

E. Installation of Programmable Application Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of programmable application controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

F. Application-Specific Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of application-specific controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. For controllers not mounted directly on equipment being controlled, install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3.4 ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTIONS
A. Connect electrical power to DDC system products requiring electrical power connections.

B. Design of electrical power to products not indicated with electric power is delegated to DDC system provider and installing trade. Work shall comply with NFPA 70 and other requirements indicated.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for electrical power circuit breakers.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical power conductors and cables.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power raceways and boxes.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification products and installation.

B. Install laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with unique identification on face for each of the following:

1. DDC controller.

2. Electrical power device.

3. Accessory.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 32
100% Design Submittal
C. Install unique instrument identification on face of each instrument connected to a DDC controller.

D. Install unique identification on face of each control damper actuator connected to a DDC controller.

E. Where product is installed above accessible tile ceiling, also install matching identification on face of ceiling grid located directly below.

F. Where product is installed above an inaccessible ceiling, also install identification on face of access door directly below.

G. Warning Labels and Signs:

1. Shall be permanently attached to equipment that can be automatically started by DDC control system.

2. Shall be located in highly visible location near power service entry points.

3.6 CONTROL WIRE, CABLE AND RACEWAYS INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wire and Cable Installation:

1. Comply with installation requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

2. Comply with installation requirements in Section 271313 "Communications Copper Backbone Cabling."

3. Comply with installation requirements in Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling."

4. Install cables with protective sheathing that is waterproof and capable of withstanding continuous temperatures of 90 degrees C with no measurable effect on physical and electrical properties of cable.
a. Provide shielding to prevent interference and distortion from adjacent cables and equipment.

5. Terminate wiring in a junction box.
a. Clamp cable over jacket in junction box.
b. Individual conductors in the stripped section of the cable shall be slack between the clamping point and terminal block.

6. Terminate field wiring and cable not directly connected to instruments and control devices having integral wiring terminals using terminal blocks.

7. Install signal transmission components according to IEEE C2, REA Form 511a, NFPA 70, and as indicated.

8. Use shielded cable to transmitters.

9. Use shielded cable to temperature sensors.

10. Perform continuity and meager testing on wire and cable after installation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 33
100% Design Submittal
C. Conduit Installation:

1. Comply with Section "260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for controlvoltage conductors.

2. Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for balanced twisted pair cabling and optical fiber installation.

3.7 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 271323 "Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling."
B. Comply with installation requirements in Section 271523 "Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling."

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Testing:

1. Perform preinstallation, in-progress, and final tests, supplemented by additional tests, as necessary.

2. Preinstallation Cable Verification: Verify integrity and serviceability for new cable lengths before installation. This assurance may be provided by using vendor verification documents, testing, or other methods. As a minimum, furnish evidence of verification for cable attenuation and bandwidth parameters.

3. In-Progress Testing: Perform standard tests for correct pair identification and termination during installation to ensure proper installation and cable placement. Perform tests in addition to those specified if there is any reason to question condition of material furnished and installed. Testing accomplished is to be documented by agency conducting tests. Submit test results for Project record.

4. Final Testing: Perform final test of installed system to demonstrate acceptability as installed. Testing shall be performed according to a test plan supplied by DDC system manufacturer. Defective Work or material shall be corrected and retested. As a minimum, final testing for cable system, including spare cable, shall verify conformance of attenuation, length, and bandwidth parameters with performance indicated.

5. Test Equipment: Use an optical fiber time domain reflectometer for testing of length and optical connectivity.

6. Test Results: Record test results and submit copy of test results for Project record. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 34
100% Design Submittal

3.9 DDC SYSTEM I/O CHECKOUT PROCEDURES
A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests and calibration.

B. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

C. Check instruments for proper installation on direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

D. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material and support.

E. For pneumatic products, verify that air supply for each product is properly installed.

F. Control Damper Checkout:

1. For pneumatic dampers, verify that pressure gages are provided in each air line to damper actuator and positioner.

2. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction.

3. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

4. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed.

5. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment is secure.

6. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source.

7. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

G. Instrument Checkout:

1. Verify that instrument is correctly installed for location, orientation, direction and operating clearances.

2. Verify that attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that conduit connections are properly secured and sealed.

4. Verify that wiring is properly labeled with unique identification, correct type and size and is securely attached to proper terminals.

5. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal.

6. For instruments with tubing connections, verify that tubing attachment is secure and isolation valves have been provided.

7. For flow instruments, verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have been maintained.

8. For temperature instruments:
a. Verify sensing element type and proper material.
b. Verify length and insertion.

3.10 DDC SYSTEM I/O ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION AND TESTING:

A. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation.

B. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 35
100% Design Submittal
C. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and accuracy.

D. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall comply with instrument manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

F. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. An installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

G. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer.

H. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance instruments.

I. Comply with field testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE's Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated.

J. Analog Signals:

1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating span using a precision-resistant source.

K. Digital Signals:

1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire.

2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

L. Control Dampers:

1. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressure.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less than 30 seconds.

4. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

M. Meters: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

N. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

O. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 36
100% Design Submittal
P. Transmitters:

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source.

3.11 DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLER CHECKOUT
A. Verify power supply.

1. Verify voltage, phase and hertz.

2. Verify that protection from power surges is installed and functioning.

3. Verify that ground fault protection is installed.

4. If applicable, verify if connected to UPS unit.

5. If applicable, verify if connected to a backup power source.

6. If applicable, verify that power conditioning units, transient voltage suppression and high-frequency noise filter units are installed.

B. Verify that wire and cabling is properly secured to terminals and labeled with unique identification.

C. Verify that spare I/O capacity is provided.

3.12 DDC CONTROLLER I/O CONTROL LOOP TESTS
A. Testing:

1. Test every I/O point connected to DDC controller to verify that safety and operating control set points are as indicated and as required to operate controlled system safely and at optimum performance.

2. Test every I/O point throughout its full operating range.

3. Test every control loop to verify operation is stable and accurate.

4. Adjust control loop proportional, integral and derivative settings to achieve optimum performance while complying with performance requirements indicated. Document testing of each control loop's precision and stability via trend logs.

5. Test and adjust every control loop for proper operation according to sequence of operation.

6. Test software and hardware interlocks for proper operation. Correct deficiencies.

7. Operate each analog point at the following:
a. Upper quarter of range.
b. Lower quarter of range.
c. At midpoint of range.

8. Exercise each binary point.

9. For every I/O point in DDC system, read and record each value at operator workstation, at DDC controller and at field instrument simultaneously. Value displayed at operator workstation, at DDC controller and at field instrument shall match. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 37
100% Design Submittal

10. Prepare and submit a report documenting results for each I/O point in DDC system and include in each I/O point a description of corrective measures and adjustments made to achieve desire results.

3.13 DDC SYSTEM VALIDATION TESTS
A. Perform validation tests before requesting final review of system. Before beginning testing, first submit Pretest Checklist and Test Plan.

B. After approval of Test Plan, execute all tests and procedures indicated in plan.

C. After testing is complete, submit completed test checklist.

D. Pretest Checklist: Submit the following list with items checked off once verified:

1. Detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified.

2. Required mechanical installation work is successfully completed and HVAC equipment is working correctly.

3. HVAC equipment motors operate below full-load amperage ratings.

4. Required DDC system components, wiring, and accessories are installed.

5. Installed DDC system architecture matches approved Drawings.

6. Control electric power circuits operate at proper voltage and are free from faults.

7. Required surge protection is installed.

8. DDC system network communications function properly, including uploading and downloading programming changes.

9. Using BACnet protocol analyzer, verify that communications are error free.

10. Each controller's programming is backed up.

11. Equipment, products, tubing, wiring cable and conduits are properly labeled.

12. All I/O points are programmed into controllers.

13. Testing, adjusting and balancing work affecting controls is complete.

14. Dampers and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly.

15. Each control damper and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power.

16. Meter, sensor and transmitter readings are accurate and calibrated.

17. Control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation.

18. View trend data where applicable.

19. Each controller works properly in standalone mode.

20. Safety controls and devices function properly.

21. Interfaces with fire-alarm system function properly.

22. Electrical interlocks function properly.

23. Record Drawings are completed.

E. Test Plan:

1. Prepare and submit a validation test plan including test procedures for performance validation tests.

2. Test plan shall address all specified functions of DDC system and sequences of operation.

3. Explain detailed actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated.

4. Explain method for simulating necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate performance.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 38
100% Design Submittal

5. Include a test checklist to be used to check and initial that each test has been successfully completed.

6. Submit test plan documentation 10 business days before start of tests.

F. Validation Test:

1. Verify operating performance of each I/O point in DDC system. a. Verify analog I/O points at operating value.
b. Make adjustments to out-of-tolerance I/O points.
1) Identify I/O points for future reference.
2) Simulate abnormal conditions to demonstrate proper function of safety devices.
3) Replace instruments and controllers that cannot maintain performance indicated after adjustments.

2. Readjust settings to design values and observe ability of DDC system to establish desired conditions.

3. After 24 Hours following Initial Validation Test:
a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during initial test. b. Identify I/O points that still require additional correction and make corrections necessary to achieve desired results.

4. After 24 Hours of Second Validation Test:
a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during second test. b. Continue validation testing until I/O point is normal on two consecutive tests.

5. Completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to ensure that DDC system performs according to requirements indicated.

6. After validation testing is complete, prepare and submit a report indicating all I/O points that required correction and how many validation re-tests it took to pass. Identify adjustments made for each test and indicate instruments that were replaced.

3.14 FINAL REVIEW
A. Submit written request to Engineer and Construction Manager when DDC system is ready for final review. Written request shall state the following:

1. DDC system has been thoroughly inspected for compliance with contract documents and found to be in full compliance.

2. DDC system has been calibrated, adjusted and tested and found to comply with requirements of operational stability, accuracy, speed and other performance requirements indicated.

3. DDC system monitoring and control of HVAC systems results in operation according to sequences of operation indicated.

4. DDC system is complete and ready for final review.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 39
100% Design Submittal
B. Review by Engineer and Construction Manager shall be made after receipt of written request. A field report shall be issued to document observations and deficiencies.

C. Take prompt action to remedy deficiencies indicated in field report and submit a second written request when all deficiencies have been corrected. Repeat process until no deficiencies are reported.

D. Should more than two reviews be required, DDC system manufacturer and Installer shall compensate entity performing review for total costs, labor and expenses, associated with third and subsequent reviews. Estimated cost of each review shall be submitted and approved by DDC system manufacturer and Installer before making the review.

E. Prepare and submit closeout submittals when no deficiencies are reported.

F. A part of DDC system final review shall include a demonstration to parties participating in final review.

1. Provide staff familiar with DDC system installed to demonstrate operation of DDC system during final review.

2. Provide testing equipment to demonstrate accuracy and other performance requirements of DDC system that is requested by reviewers during final review.

3. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Accuracy and calibration of 10 I/O points randomly selected by reviewers. If review finds that some I/O points are not properly calibrated and not satisfying performance requirements indicated, additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers until total I/O points being reviewed that satisfy requirements equals quantity indicated.
b. HVAC equipment and system hardwired and software safeties and life-safety functions are operating according to sequence of operation. Up to 10 I/O points shall be randomly selected by reviewers. Additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers to discover problems with operation.
c. Correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption after electrical power is restored for randomly selected HVAC systems. d. Operation of randomly selected dampers and valves in normal-on, normal-off and failed positions.
e. Reporting of alarm conditions for randomly selected alarms, including different classes of alarms, to ensure that alarms are properly received by operators and operator workstations.
f. Trends, summaries, logs and reports set-up for Project. g. For up to three HVAC systems randomly selected by reviewers, use graph trends to show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner and that HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including different modes of operations indicated. Show that control loops are stable and operating at set points and respond to changes in set point of 20 percent or more. h. Software's ability to communicate with controllers, operator workstations, uploading and downloading of control programs.
i. Software's ability to edit control programs off-line. j. Data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability including parameter changes.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 40
100% Design Submittal
k. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update, and direct access to graphics.
l. Execution of digital and analog commands in graphic mode. m. Spreadsheet and curve plot software and its integration with database. n. Online user guide and help functions.
o. Multitasking by showing different operations occurring simultaneously on four quadrants of split screen.
p. System speed of response compared to requirements indicated. q. For Each Programmable Application Controller:
1) Memory: Programmed data, parameters, trend and alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during power failure. 2) Operator Interface: Ability to connect directly to each type of digital controller with a portable workstation and mobile device. Show that maintenance personnel interface tools perform as indicated in manufacturer's technical literature.
3) Standalone Ability: Demonstrate that controllers provide stable and reliable standalone operation using default values or other method for values normally read over network.
4) Electric Power: Ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power source.
5) Wiring Labels: Match control drawings.
6) Network Communication: Ability to locate a controller's location on network and communication architecture matches Shop Drawings. 7) Nameplates and Tags: Accurate and permanently attached to control panel doors, instrument, actuators and devices.

3.15 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.16 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative with complete knowledge of Project-specific system installed to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DDC system.

B. Extent of Training:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 41
100% Design Submittal

1. Base extent of training on scope and complexity of DDC system indicated and training requirements indicated. Provide extent of training required to satisfy requirements indicated even if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

2. Inform Owner of anticipated training requirements if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

3. Minimum Training Requirements:
a. Stagger training over multiple training classes to accommodate Owner's requirements. All training shall occur before end of warranty period. b. Total days of training shall be broken into not more than two separate training classes.
c. Each training class shall be not less than one day.

C. Training Schedule:

1. Schedule training with Owner 20 business days before expected Substantial Completion.

2. Schedule training to provide Owner with at least 10 business days of notice in advance of training.

3. Provide staggered training schedule as requested by Owner.

D. Training Attendee List and Sign-in Sheet:

1. Request from Owner in advance of training a proposed attendee list with name, phone number and e-mail address.

2. Provide a preprinted sign-in sheet for each training session with proposed attendees listed and no fewer than six blank spaces to add additional attendees.

3. Preprinted sign-in sheet shall include training session number, date and time, instructor name, phone number and e-mail address, and brief description of content to be covered during session. List attendees with columns for name, phone number, e-mail address and a column for attendee signature or initials.

4. Circulate sign-in sheet at beginning of each session and solicit attendees to sign or initial in applicable location.

5. At end of each training day, send Owner an e-mail with an attachment of scanned copy (PDF) of circulated sign-in sheet for each session.

E. Attendee Training Manuals:

1. Provide each attendee with a color hard copy of all training materials and visual presentations.

2. Hard-copy materials shall be organized in a three-ring binder with table of contents and individual divider tabs marked for each logical grouping of subject matter. Organize material to provide space for attendees to take handwritten notes within training manuals.

3. In addition to hard-copy materials included in training manual, provide each binder with a sleeve or pocket that includes a DVD or flash drive with PDF copy of all hard-copy materials.

F. Instructor Requirements:

1. One or multiple qualified instructors, as required, to provide training. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 42
100% Design Submittal

2. Instructors shall have not less than five years of providing instructional training on not less than five past projects with similar DDC system scope and complexity to DDC system installed.

G. Organization of Training Sessions:

1. Organize training sessions into logical groupings of technical content and to reflect different levels of operators having access to system. Plan training sessions to accommodate the following three levels of operators:
a. Daily operators.
b. Advanced operators.
c. System managers and administrators.

2. Plan and organize training sessions to group training content to protect DDC system security. Some attendees may be restricted to some training sessions that cover restricted content for purposes of maintaining DDC system security.

H. Training Outline:

1. Submit training outline for Owner review at least 10 business day before scheduling training.

2. Outline shall include a detailed agenda for each training day that is broken down into each of four training sessions that day, training objectives for each training session and synopses for each lesson planned.

I. On-Site Training:

1. Owner will provide conditioned classroom or workspace with ample desks or tables, chairs, power and data connectivity for instructor and each attendee.

2. Instructor shall provide training materials, projector and other audiovisual equipment used in training.

3. Provide as much of training located on-site as deemed feasible and practical by Owner.

4. On-site training shall include regular walk-through tours, as required, to observe each unique product type installed with hands-on review of operation, calibration and service requirements.

5. Operator workstation provided with DDC system shall be used in training. If operator workstation is not indicated, provide a temporary workstation to convey training content.

J. Training Content for Daily Operators:

1. Basic operation of system.

2. Understanding DDC system architecture and configuration.

3. Understanding each unique product type installed including performance and service requirements for each.

4. Understanding operation of each system and equipment controlled by DDC system including sequences of operation, each unique control algorithm and each unique optimization routine.

5. Operating operator workstations, printers and other peripherals.

6. Logging on and off system.

7. Accessing graphics, reports and alarms.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 43
100% Design Submittal

8. Adjusting and changing set points and time schedules.

9. Recognizing DDC system malfunctions.

10. Understanding content of operation and maintenance manuals including control drawings.

11. Understanding physical location and placement of DDC controllers and I/O hardware.

12. Accessing data from DDC controllers.

13. Operating portable operator workstations.

14. Review of DDC testing results to establish basic understanding of DDC system operating performance and HVAC system limitations as of Substantial Completion.

15. Running each specified report and log.

16. Displaying and demonstrating each data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability. Demonstrating parameter changes.

17. Stepping through graphics penetration tree, displaying all graphics, demonstrating dynamic updating, and direct access to graphics.

18. Executing digital and analog commands in graphic mode.

19. Demonstrating control loop precision and stability via trend logs of I/O for not less than 10 percent of I/O installed.

20. Demonstrating DDC system performance through trend logs and command tracing.

21. Demonstrating scan, update, and alarm responsiveness.

22. Demonstrating spreadsheet and curve plot software, and its integration with database.

23. Demonstrating on-line user guide and help function and mail facility.

24. Demonstrating multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction operating simultaneously via split screen.

25. Demonstrating the following for HVAC systems and equipment controlled by DDC system:
a. Operation of HVAC equipment in normal-off, -on and failed conditions while observing individual equipment, dampers and valves for correct position under each condition.
b. For HVAC equipment with factory-installed software, show that integration into DDC system is able to communicate with DDC controllers or gateways, as applicable.
c. Using graphed trends, show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner, and HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including seasonal change, occupied and unoccupied modes, warm-up and cool-down cycles and other modes of operation indicated. d. Hardware interlocks and safeties function properly and DDC system performs correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption after power is restored.
e. Reporting of alarm conditions for each alarm, and confirm that alarms are received at assigned locations, including operator workstations. f. Each control loop responds to set point adjustment and stabilizes within time period indicated.
g. Sharing of previously graphed trends of all control loops to demonstrate that each control loop is stable and set points are being maintained.

K. Training Content for Advanced Operators:

1. Making and changing workstation graphics.

2. Creating, deleting and modifying alarms including annunciation and routing. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC Renovation & Expansion Final Design 230923 - 44
100% Design Submittal

3. Creating, deleting and modifying point trend logs including graphing and printing on an ad-hoc basis and operator-defined time intervals.

4. Creating, deleting and modifying reports.

5. Creating, deleting and modifying points.

6. Creating, deleting and modifying programming including ability to edit control programs off-line.

7. Creating, deleting and modifying system graphics and other types of displays.

8. Adding operator workstations.

9. Performing DDC system checkout and diagnostic procedures.

10. Performing DDC controllers operation and maintenance procedures.

11. Performing operator workstation operation and maintenance procedures.

12. Configuring DDC system hardware including controllers, workstations, communication devices and I/O points.

13. Maintaining, calibrating, troubleshooting, diagnosing and repairing hardware.

14. Adjusting, calibrating and replacing DDC system components.

L. Training Content for System Managers and Administrators:

1. DDC system software maintenance and backups.

2. Uploading, downloading and off-line archiving of all DDC system software and databases.

3. Interface with Project-specific, third-party operator software.

4. Understanding password and security procedures.

5. Adding new operators and making modifications to existing operators.

6. Operator password assignments and modification.

7. Operator authority assignment and modification.

8. Workstation data segregation and modification.

M. Video of Training Sessions:

1. Provide a digital video and audio recording of each training session. Create a separate recording file for each session.

2. Stamp each recording file with training session number, session name and date.

3. Provide Owner with two copies of digital files for later reference and for use in future training.

4. Owner retains right to make additional copies for intended training purposes without having to pay royalties.

END OF SECTION 230923
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Double-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

3. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

4. Double-wall round ducts and fittings.

5. Sheet metal materials.

6. Sealants and gaskets.

7. Hangers and supports.

8. Seismic-restraint devices.

9. Delegated Design.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (State of California).

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 2
100% Design Submittal

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts.

5. Dimensions of all duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation.

1.5 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Sheet metal thicknesses.

B. Joint and seam construction and sealing.

C. Reinforcement details and spacing.

D. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.

E. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 3
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 “Quality Requirements” to design the following:

1. Ensure duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity, wind and seismic loads defined in Sections 018829 and 018839 within limits and under conditions to comply with ASCE/SEI 7 and SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual:

Guidelines for Mechanical Systems - OSHPD Edition."
C. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.

2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for staticpressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1.

2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Verify all longitudinal seams are Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise specified for specific application.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 4
100% Design Submittal
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for clear internal dimensions of the inner duct.

B. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. For ducts exposed to weather, construct outer duct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

3. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.

F. Inner Duct: Minimum 24-gauge solid galvanized sheet steel. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 5
100% Design Submittal

2.4 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.

2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with buttwelded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.5 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension) of the inner duct.

1. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
a. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. b. For ducts exposed to weather, construct outer duct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

2. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 6
100% Design Submittal
Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
a. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
a. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
b. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

4. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Inner Duct: Minimum 24-gauge solid galvanized sheet steel.

C. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

3. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.

2.6 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Ensure sheet metal materials are free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Verify exposed surface finish is No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 7
100% Design Submittal
D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch- minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.7 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Verify surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets have a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 6 inches.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.

10. Sealant: has a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

11. Sealant complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 8
100% Design Submittal

2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.

3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.

4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.

5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.

6. Water resistant.

7. Mold and mildew resistant.

8. Sealant: has a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

9. Sealant complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

11. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

12. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. Sealant: has a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

7. Sealant complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal provides maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and is rated for10- inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.

2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods: Stainless-steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
C. Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A603.

D. Cables for Stainless Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 9
100% Design Submittal
E. Steel Cable End Connections: Stainless-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless Steel Ducts: Stainless steel shapes and plates.

2.9 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications as defined in reports by OSHPD, in State of California.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Ensure allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components is at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

B. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A492, stainless steel cables with end connections made of galvanizedsteel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings.

B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 10
100% Design Submittal
D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

J. Install fire and smoke dampers where indicated on Drawings and as required by code, and by local authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and specific installation requirements of the damper UL listing.

K. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in air ducts where indicated on Drawings.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation.

M. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.

N. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 11
100% Design Submittal

3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR LABORATORY EXHAUST AND

FUME HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS
A. Install ducts in accordance with NFPA 45, "Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals." B. Install exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold water. Slope ducts a minimum of 2 percent back to hood or inlet. Where indicated on Drawings, install trapped drain piping.

C. Connect duct to fan, fume hood, and other equipment indicated on Drawings.

3.4 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER
A. All external joints are to be welded. Seal all openings to provide weatherproof construction.

B. Construct ductwork to resist external loads of wind, snow, ice, and other effects of weather.

Provide necessary supporting structures.

C. Single Wall:

1. Ductwork shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

2. Where ducts have external insulation, provide weatherproof aluminum jacket. See Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."
D. Double Wall:

1. Ductwork shall comply with requirements in "Double-Wall Rectangular Ducts and Fittings" or "Double-Wall Round Ducts and Fittings" Article.

2. Ductwork outer wall shall be Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

3. Provide interstitial insulation.

3.5 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B.

6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher than 2-inch wg: Seal Class A.

7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 12
100% Design Submittal

8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.

9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C.

10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher than 2-inch wg: Seal Class B.

11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.7 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restrain Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems - OSHPD Edition."

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c.

2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 13
100% Design Submittal
B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by OSHPD.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling.

Notify Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless steel anchors for applications exposed to weather.

3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test all systems

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 14
100% Design Submittal

4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers, and other duct-mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage.

5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media not to exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. For cleaning of existing ductwork, see Section 230130.52 "Existing HVAC Air Distribution System Cleaning."
C. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR.

D. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure and leakage class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

E. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 15
100% Design Submittal
F. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

G. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.11 STARTUP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.12 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as indicated below.

B. Supply Ducts:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 16
100% Design Submittal

1. Ducts Connected to Terminal Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 8.

2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 8.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 4.

3. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 4.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 2.

4. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 4.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 2.

C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 8.

2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed above:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 8.

D. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 3-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 17
100% Design Submittal
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 8.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 4.

2. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting Fume Hood, Laboratory, and Process (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 3 and Class 4) Air:
a. Type 316, stainless steel sheet.
1) Exposed to View: No. 4 finish.
2) Concealed: No. 2B finish.
b. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 4-inch wg.
c. Welded seams and joints.

E. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

2. Stainless Steel Ducts:
a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Ducts
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233113 - 18
100% Design Submittal

2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.
2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.
3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.
4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

G. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

END OF SECTION 233113
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Control dampers.

3. Fire dampers.

4. Flange connectors.

5. Turning vanes.

6. Remote damper operators.

7. Flexible connectors.

8. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Control-damper installations.
d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators.
e. Duct security bars.
f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

2. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames:
a. Hat shaped.
b. 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
c. Mitered and welded corners.
d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Stainless steel.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 3
100% Design Submittal

7. Bearings:
a. Stainless steel sleeve.
b. Ensure dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel.

10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

11. Accessories:
a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.

B. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.2 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

B. Frames:

1. Hat shaped.

2. 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel.

3. Mitered and welded corners.

C. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches.

2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design.

3. Galvanized-steel.

4. 0.064 inch thick single skin.

5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene.

6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; stainless steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Bearings:

1. Oil-impregnated stainless steel sleeve.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 4
100% Design Submittal

2. Ensure dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Type: dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

B. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners; gauge in accordance with UL listing.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless steel closure spring.

I. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric, link and switch package, factory installed, 165 deg F rated.

2.4 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS FOR UNCLASSIFIED AIR
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal:

1. Air Products and Controls.

2. System Sensor.

B. Type: UL or CSA listed, photoelectric.

C. Housing: Refer to Materials of Construction Schedule.

D. Sampling Tube Material: Galvanized steel for galvanized steel ducts. Aluminum for aluminum ducts.

E. Operating Voltage: 115 VAC, 24 VAC, or 24 VDC.

F. Relay Contacts: Alarm condition, trouble condition, and equipment shutdown. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 5
100% Design Submittal

2.5 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS FOR CLASSIFIED FOUL AIR
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal:

1. Det-Tronics.

B. Type: UL or CSA listed, photoelectric.

C. Rating: Class 1 Division 1 Group C.

D. Housing: IP44.

E. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC.

F. Relay Contacts: Alarm condition, trouble condition, and equipment shutdown.

G. Duct-mount Accessory:

1. Housing: NEMA 4X.

2. Body Material: Aluminum.

3. Mounting Plate Material: Aluminum.

4. Fastener Material: Stainless steel.

5. Sampling Tube Material: Aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel.

6. Sampling Tube Length: Coordinate with duct diameter. Cut to match duct diameter.

2.6 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Description: Add-on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

B. Material: Galvanized steel.

C. Gauge and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.7 TURNING VANES
A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 6
100% Design Submittal
D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.8 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS
A. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment.

B. Tubing: Brass.

C. Cable: Stainless steel.

D. Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed.

E. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Stainless steel.

2.9 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

B. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0428-inch stainless steel.

C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Ensure panel fasteners do not penetrate duct wall.

D. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F.

E. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating.

1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch in the warp and 340 lbf/inch in the filling. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 7
100% Design Submittal

3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F.

F. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop.

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in stainless steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 8
100% Design Submittal
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.

H. Install duct security bars. Construct duct security bars from 0.164-inchsteel sleeve, continuously welded at all joints and 1/2-inch- diameter steel bars, 6 inches o.c. in each direction in center of sleeve. Weld each bar to steel sleeve and each crossing bar. Weld 2-1/2-by-2-1/2-by-1/4-inch steel angle to 4 sides and both ends of sleeve. Connect duct security bars to ducts with flexible connections. Provide 12-by-12-inch hinged access panel with cam lock in duct in each side of sleeve.

I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Upstream from duct filters.

3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

4. At drain pans and seals.

5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment.

6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links are pressure relief access doors; outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.

8. Upstream from turning vanes.

9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.

10. Control devices requiring inspection.

11. Elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

L. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

N. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 9
100% Design Submittal
O. Connect diffusers to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.

3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper.

END OF SECTION 233300
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Duct Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233300 - 10
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building HVAC Power Ventilators Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233423 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.

2. Centrifugal ventilators

3. High-Plume Dilution Laboratory Exhaust System

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fans.

2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

3. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

4. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

6. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

8. Prefabricated roof curbs.

9. Fan speed controllers.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC power ventilators to include in normal and emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building HVAC Power Ventilators Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233423 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

2.2 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

B. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel removable for service.

C. Back-draft damper: Integral.

D. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew or spring retainer attachment to fan housing.

E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

F. Accessories:

1. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.

2. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.

3. Manufacturer's standard roof wall cap, and transition fittings.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF DOWNBLAST
A. Housing: Downblast; removable spun-aluminum dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

B. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

C. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp.

6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

D. Accessories:

1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building HVAC Power Ventilators Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233423 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted outside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.

E. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 12 inches.

3. Hinged sub-base to provide access to damper or as cleanout for grease applications.

4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

2.4 HIGH-PLUME DILUTION LABORATORY EXHASUT SYSTEM
A. General:

1. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb. /ft³).

2. Fans selected shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of +/- 15% of scheduled values.

3. Each fan shall be belt driven in AMCA arrangement 9.

4. Each fan to be equipped with 316 stainless steel lifting lugs for corrosion resistance.

5. Fasteners exposed to corrosive exhaust shall be 316 stainless steel.

6. Curb cap shall be 316 stainless steel.

7. Fan assemblies that use flexible connectors that can fail, and cause loss of laboratory containment shall not be acceptable.

8. Fan assembly shall be designed for a minimum of 125-mph wind loading, without the use of guy wires.

9. Motor cover shall be hinged with removable side panels for ease of maintenance to allow the servicing of the motor and drive.

10. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

B. Corrosion Resistant Coating:

1. All steel fan and system components (fan, nozzle, windband and plenum) shall be corrosion resistant coated with electrostatically applied and baked, sustainable, corrosionresistant coating system.

2. All parts shall be cleaned and chemically prepared for coating using a multistage wash system which includes acid pickling to remove oxide, improving the coating bond to the substrate.

3. The first powder coat applied over the prepared surface shall be an epoxy primer. After application, the coating shall be heated to a gelatinous consistency (partial cure) at which time the second powder coat of polyester resin shall be electrostatically applied and then be cured simultaneously at a uniform temperature of 400°F (204°C). ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building HVAC Power Ventilators Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233423 - 4
100% Design Submittal

4. The coating system shall not be less than a total thickness of 6 mils, shall not be affected by the UV component of sunlight (does not chalk), and have superior corrosion resistance to acid, alkali, and solvents. Coating system shall exceed 4000-hour ASTM B117 Salt Spray Resistance.

C. Fan Housing and Outlet:

1. Fan housing shall be aerodynamically designed with high-efficiency inlet, engineered to reduce incoming air turbulence.

2. Fan housing shall be bifurcated, allowing all drive components, including the motor, to be serviced without contact of the contaminated airstream. Must be manufactured of welded steel and meet specification section 2.4.B for corrosion resistant coating. No uncoated metal fan parts will be acceptable.

3. Fan housings that are fabricated of polypropylene or fiberglass that have lower mechanical properties than steel, have rough interior surfaces in which corrosive, hazardous compounds can collect, and / or which chalk and structurally degrade due to the UV component of the sunlight shall not be acceptable.

4. A multi-stage air induction discharge nozzle shall be supplied by the fan manufacturer be designed to efficiently handle an outlet velocity of up to 7000 FPM. The multi-stage nozzle shall induce ambient air up to 270% of fan capacity. Nozzle / windband assemblies that are manufactured by third party vendors or that are fabricated of plastic or resins, having mechanical properties less than steel shall not be acceptable.

5. An integral fan housing drain shall be used to drain rainwater when the fan is deenergized.

6. An access door shall be supplied for impeller inspection and service.

7. Fan assembly shall be AMCA type C spark resistant construction minimum.

D. Fan Impeller:

1. Fan impeller shall be mixed flow design with non-stall characteristics. The impeller shall be electronically balanced both statically and dynamically exceeding AMCA Standards.

2. Fan impeller shall be manufactured of welded and coated steel. Reference specification section 2.4.B for corrosion resistant coating.

3. Fan impellers that are fabricated of polypropylene or fiberglass that have lower mechanical properties than steel and lower maximum tip speeds are not acceptable.

4. Vacuum Seal: Fan impeller shall include a secondary fan blade located on the impeller back plate. This secondary impeller shall create a negative pressure at the shaft opening; preventing hazardous or toxic exhaust fumes from escaping through the housing shaft opening. Mechanical shaft seals that wear out and need to be replaced or seal systems that use hoses or tubes that can leak, are not acceptable.

E. Bypass Air Plenum:

1. For variable volume systems, a bypass air plenum shall be provided. The plenum shall be provided with bypass air damper(s) for introducing outside air at roof level upstream of the fan, complete with bypass air weatherhood and bird screen.

2. The plenum shall be constructed of welded and coated steel and meet specification section 2.4.B for corrosion resistant coating. Plenums that are fabricated of plastics or resins that are combustible and have mechanical properties less than steel shall not be acceptable.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building HVAC Power Ventilators Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233423 - 5
100% Design Submittal

3. The bypass air plenum shall be mounted on factory fabricated roof curb provided by the fan manufacturer.

4. Fan designs that use inlet flexible connectors that can leak causing loss of lab exhaust shall not be permitted.

5. Bypass Air Damper(s):
a. Opposed-blade design for airflow control, airfoil design, fabricated of 316 stainless steel for structural rigidity as standard.
b. Bypass damper(s) shall have plated steel damper rods, stainless steel sleeved bearings, 301 stainless steel jamb seals and the blades shall have polymer edge seals.
c. Damper model shall be equal to or exceed a heavy-duty control damper, Greenheck HCD-130.
d. Damper blade drive linkage shall be set by manufacturer and welded to eliminate linkage slippage.
e. All damper access and service (drive actuators) shall be performed outside of the contaminated airstream.

6. Fan Isolation Damper(s):
a. Parallel-blade design, airfoil design, fabricated of 304 stainless steel construction for structural rigidity as standard.
b. Isolation damper(s) shall have 304 stainless steel damper, stainless steel sleeved bearings, 301 stainless steel jamb seals and the blades shall have polymer edge seals.
c. Damper model shall be equal to or exceed a heavy-duty control damper, Greenheck HCD-130.
d. Damper blade drive linkage shall be set by manufacturer and welded to eliminate linkage slippage.
e. All damper access and service (drive actuators) shall be performed outside of the contaminated airstream.

7. Isolation damper actuator(s) shall be factory mounted and shall be wired to a step-down transformer. Actuator and transformer are located in a weatherproof enclosure.

8. Blower / Plenum vibration isolation shall be limited to neoprene / cork vibration pads.

F. Bypass Air Plenum:

1. Exhaust system manufacturer shall supply a structural support curb for the plenum of specified height as shown on the drawings.

2. Curb shall be fabricated of a minimum of 12-gauge corrosion-resistant coated steel and structurally reinforced.

3. Curb shall be insulated.

4. The standard curb / plenum / blower assembly shall withstand wind loads of up to 125 mph without additional structural support.

G. Fan Motor and Drive:

1. Motors shall be premium efficiency, standard NEMA frame, 1800 or 3600 RPM, TEFC with a 1.15 service factor. A factory-mounted NEMA 4X disconnect switch shall be provided for each fan.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building HVAC Power Ventilators Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233423 - 6
100% Design Submittal

2. Motor maintenance shall be accomplished without fan impeller removal or requiring maintenance personnel to access the contaminated exhaust components. Drive arrangement shall be AMCA arrangement 9.

3. Drive belts and sheaves shall be sized for 200% of the fan operating brake horsepower, and shall be readily and easily accessible for service, if required. Drive shall consist of a minimum of two belts under all circumstances.

4. Fan shaft to be turned and polished of 316 stainless steel as standard, coated with corrosion resistant coating.

5. Fan shaft bearings shall be Air Handling Quality, ball or roller pillow block type and be sized for an L-10 life of no less than 200,000 hours. Bearings shall be fixed to the fan shaft using concentric mounting locking collars, which reduce vibration, increase service life, and improve serviceability. Bearings that use setscrews shall not be acceptable.

6. All shaft bearings and non-permanently lubricated motors shall have stainless steel braided extended lube lines with Zerk fittings.

7. Belt drive motors shall have ventilated motor cover. Motor cover shall be hinged with removable side panels for ease of maintenance to allow the servicing of the motor and drive(s).

2.5 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Certification: Fans comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311, and label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Sound ratings comply with AMCA 301. The fans tested according to AMCA 300.

D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified Rating Seal. Fans tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power, fan efficiency, air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51.

E. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

F. UL Standards: Power ventilators comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust also comply with UL 762.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building HVAC Power Ventilators Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233423 - 7
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual.

B. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with stainless steel hardware.

D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch.

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Pipe laboratory exhaust fan housing drain to nearest roof drain.

G. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

1. Nameplate: laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate: laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.

3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS
A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building HVAC Power Ventilators Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233423 - 8
100% Design Submittal

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space.

4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

6. Adjust belt tension.

7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

10. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

11. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

12. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fans.

END OF SECTION 233423
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Terminal Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233600 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Pressure control terminal units.

2. Exhaust single-duct terminal units.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of air terminal unit.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for air terminal units.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

4. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation.

1.4 DELEGATED-DESIGN SUBMITTAL

1. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.

2. Include design calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Terminal Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233600 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. b. Instructions for adjusting software set points.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.

B. Casing: 0.040-inch- thick galvanized steel, single wall.

1. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

2. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size.

3. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket.

4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Verify bellows operate at temperatures from zero to 140 deg F, impervious to moisture and fungus, suitable for 10-inch wg static pressure, and factory tested for leaks.

D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: AHRI 880 rated, 3percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Terminal Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233600 - 3
100% Design Submittal
E. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with primary automatic, and secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless steel hardware.

1. Stage(s): 3.

2. SCR controlled.

3. Access door interlocked disconnect switch.

4. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge-air temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable).

5. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements.

6. Airflow switch for proof of airflow.

7. Fan interlock contacts.

8. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection (for coils more than 48 A).

9. Mercury contactors.

10. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.

11. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).

F. Control devices:

1. Electronic Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered open, spring return.

2. Electronic Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with temperature set-point display in Fahrenheit and Celsius.

3. Electronic Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and maximum air volumes; maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure variations up to 4-inch wg; and have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet.

4. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume (VAV) controller with electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:
a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.
b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.

5. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal.

G. Controls:

1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.

H. Control Sequences:

1. Occupied:
a. In a call for cooling, airflow will increase as the damper opens towards maximum setting to satisfy set point.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Terminal Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233600 - 4
100% Design Submittal
b. In a call for less cooling, airflow will decrease as the damper closes towards minimum setting to satisfy set point.

2. Unoccupied:
a. Damper closes to minimum maximum setting.

2.3 CRITICAL ENVIRONMENT CONTROL VALVE
A. Configuration: Venturi valve assembly inside an externally insulated unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.

B. Casing:

1. Galvanized steel.

C. Sensors: Multipoint, Type 316 stainless steel.

D. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with primary automatic, and secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless steel hardware.

1. Stage(s): 3.

2. SCR controlled.

3. Access door interlocked disconnect switch.

4. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge-air temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable).

E. Control Sequence:

1. Occupied (Primary Airflow On):
a. Operate as throttling control for cooling.
b. As cooling requirement decreases, control valve throttles toward minimum airflow. c. As heating requirement increases, fan energizes to draw in warm plenum air and electric heat modulates under SCR control.

2. Unoccupied (Primary Airflow Off):
a. When externally initiated, begin the morning warm-up/cool-down function.

Damper drives to the fully open position without regard for the preset maximum. b. When pressure at primary inlet is zero or less, fan is de-energized. c. As heating requirement increases, fan energizes to draw in warm plenum air and electric heat modulates under SCR control .

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to AHRI 880. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Terminal Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233600 - 5
100% Design Submittal

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and AHRI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 5, "Hangers and Supports" and with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers and braces designed to support the air terminal units and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on air terminal units that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by the Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Terminal Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233600 - 6
100% Design Submittal
G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items before drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling.

Notify Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Install heavyduty sleeve anchors with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless steel anchors for applications exposed to weather.

3.3 TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties," and connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for connecting ducts to air terminal units.

D. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Terminal Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233600 - 7
100% Design Submittal

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper performance.

3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

4. Verify that control connections are complete.

5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.

END OF SECTION 233600
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Air Terminal Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 233600 - 8
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 237416 - PACKAGED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged, small-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units (RTUs) with the following components:

1. Casings.

2. Fans, drives, and motors.

3. Coils.

4. Refrigerant circuit components.

5. Air filtration.

6. Dampers.

7. Electrical power connections.

8. Controls.

9. Accessories.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 230513 “Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.”

2. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

4. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

5. Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

6. Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

B. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, small-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each RTU.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

3. Include unit dimensions and weight.

4. Include cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

5. Fans:
a. Include certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
b. Include certified fan-sound power ratings.
c. Include fan construction and accessories.
d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

6. Include certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

7. Include filters with performance characteristics.

8. Include gas furnaces with performance characteristics.

9. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

1.5 DELEGATED-DESIGN SUBMITTAL
A. For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.

3. Wind- and Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set(s) of filters for each unit.

2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.

3. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven fan.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 3
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of RTUs and components.

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." D. ASHRAE 15 Compliance: For refrigeration system safety.

E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

G. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design mounting and restraints for RTUs, including comprehensive engineering analysis.

1. Design RTU supports to comply with wind and seismic performance requirements.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:

1. AAON.

2. Daikin Applied.

3. Trane.

2.3 UNIT CASINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.

B. Double-Wall Construction:

1. Outside Casing Wall: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge thick with corrosion-resistant coating, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

2. Inside Casing Wall: G90-coated galvanized steel, 0.034 inch thick.

3. Floor Plate: G90 galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge thick. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 4
100% Design Submittal

4. Casing Insulation:
a. Materials: Injected polyurethane foam insulation.
b. Casing Panel R-Value: Minimum 13.
c. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch.
d. Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through-casing metal in casing walls, floors, or roof of unit.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Static-Pressure Classifications:

1. For Unit Sections Upstream of Fans: Minus 2-inch wg.

2. For Unit Sections Downstream and Including Fans: 4-inch wg.

E. Panels and Doors:

1. Panels:
a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced with same materials and insulation thickness as casing.
b. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential. c. Gasket: Neoprene applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. d. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components.

2. Access Doors:
a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.
b. Gasket: Neoprene applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components.

3. Locations and Applications:
a. Fan Section: Doors.
b. Access Section: Doors.
c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panels.
d. Damper Section: Inspection and access panels.
e. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters.
f. Mixing Section: Doors.

F. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Location: Each type of cooling coil.

2. Construction:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 5
100% Design Submittal
a. Single wall, stainless steel sheet.

3. Drain Connection:
a. Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on both ends of pan.
b. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

4. Slope: Minimum 0.125-in./ft. slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection.

5. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face.

6. Width: Entire width of water producing device.

7. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

8. Pan-Top Surface Coating for Galvanized-Steel Drain Pans: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

9. Units with stacked coils have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil.

2.4 FANS, DRIVES, AND MOTORS
A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

B. Supply-Air Fans: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; galvanized or painted steel; mounted on solid-steel shaft.

1. Shafts: With field-adjustable alignment.
a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway.

2. Shaft Bearings:
a. Heavy-duty, self-aligning, pillow-block type with an L-50 rated life of minimum 100,000 hours according to ABMA 9.

3. Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.
a. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

4. Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow and mechanically fastened to flange and backplate; steel or aluminum hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews.

5. Mounting: For internal vibration isolation and seismic control. Factory-mount fans with manufacturer's standard restrained vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1 inch.

6. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 6
100% Design Submittal

7. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide, attached to two strips of minimum 2-3/4-inch-wide by 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Drives, Direct: Factory-mounted, direct drive.

D. Drives, Belt: Factory-mounted, V-belt drive, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor.

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at the factory.

2. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives.

3. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.146-inch- thick, diamond-mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.

E. Condenser-Coil Fan: propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated multispeed motors.

F. Motors:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

3. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

4. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron.

5. Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1.

6. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

2.5 COILS
A. General Requirements for Coils:

1. Comply with AHRI 410.

2. Fabricate coils section to allow for removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).

3. Coils do not act as structural component of unit.

B. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Tubes: Copper.

2. Fins:
a. Material: Copper.
b. Fin Spacing: Maximum 12 fins per inch.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 7
100% Design Submittal

3. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond.

4. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections.

5. Frames: Stainless steel.

6. Coatings: Corrosion-resistant coating.

7. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410. a. Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig.

C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Tubes: Copper.

2. Fins:
a. Material: Aluminum.
b. Fin Spacing: Maximum 12 fins per inch.

3. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond.

4. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections.

5. Frames: Stainless steel.

6. Coatings: resistant coating.

7. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410. a. Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig.

D. Hot-Gas Reheat Refrigerant Coil:

1. Tubes: Copper.

2. Fins:
a. Material: Aluminum.
b. Fin Spacing: Maximum 12 fins per inch.

3. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond.

4. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections.

5. Frames: Stainless steel.

6. Coatings: Corrosion-resistant coating.

7. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410. a. Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig.

8. Suction-discharge bypass valve.

E. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Comply with UL 1995.

1. Casing Assembly: Slip-in or Flanged type with galvanized-steel frame.

2. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame.

3. Overtemperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically resetting, thermal-cutout, safety device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from coil section. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 8
100% Design Submittal

4. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually resetting or manually replaceable, thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.

5. Control Panel: Remote mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. a. Magnetic contactor.
b. Solid-state, stepless pulse controller.
c. Toggle switches, one per step.
d. Step controller.
e. Time-delay relay.
f. Pilot lights, one per step.
g. Airflow proving switch.

2.6 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A. Compressor: Hermetic, variable-speed scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

B. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant: R4504B.

2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.

3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.

4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.

5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.

6. Minimum off-time relay.

7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.

8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.

9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.

10. Hot-gas reheat solenoid valve modulating with a replaceable magnetic coil.

11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.

12. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.

2.7 AIR FILTRATION
A. Panel Filters:

1. Description: Pleated factory-fabricated, self-supported, disposable air filters with holding frames.

2. Filter Unit Class: UL 900.

3. Media: Interlaced glass, synthetic or cotton fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive and antimicrobial coating.

4. Filter-Media Frame: Beverage board with perforated metal retainer, or metal grid, on outlet side.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 9
100% Design Submittal

2.8 DAMPERS
A. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade arrangement with zinc-plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate not to exceed 4 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.

B. Barometric relief dampers.

C. Electronic Damper Operators:

1. Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

2. Electronic damper position indicator has a visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

3. Operator Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.
c. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

6. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.
f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

7. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.

9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators.

10. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 120 V ac.

11. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 V ac or 8 W at 24 V dc.

12. Proportional Signal: 2 to 10 V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal.

13. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 10
100% Design Submittal

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS
A. RTU has a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.10 CONTROLS
A. DDC Controller:

1. Controller has volatile-memory backup.

2. Safety Control Operation:
a. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply-air temperature is less than 40 deg F.
b. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence.

3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a minimum of two programmable periods per day.

4. Unoccupied Period:
a. Heating Setback: 65 deg F.
b. Cooling Setback: System off.
c. Override Operation: Two hours.

5. Supply Fan Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.

6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors, and operate hot-gas bypass to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain discharge temperature. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to maintain setback temperature.
c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump.

7. Hot-Gas Reheat-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Humidistat opens hot-gas valve to provide hot-gas reheat and cycles the compressor.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Reheat not required.

8. Fixed Minimum Outdoor-Air Damper Operation (Apply to PACU-1 only):
a. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor-air damper.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 11
100% Design Submittal

2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F temperature in gas burner compartment.

B. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet is energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.

C. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.

D. Safeties:

1. Smoke detector.

2. Condensate overflow switch.

3. Phase-loss reversal protection.

4. High and low pressure control.

5. Electric coil airflow-proving switch.

E. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

F. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

G. Concentric diffuser with white louvers and polished aluminum return grilles, insulated diffuser box with mounting flanges, and interior transition.

H. Door switches to disable heating or reset set point when open.

I. Outdoor-air intake weather hood.

J. Oil separator.

K. Service Lights and Switch: Factory installed in fan and coil sections with weatherproof cover.

Factory wire lights to a single-point field connection.

2.12 MATERIALS
A. Steel:

1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or moisture.

C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

D. Aluminum: ASTM B209.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 12
100% Design Submittal
E. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Coat with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of withstanding a 3000-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B117.

1. Standards:
a. ASTM B117 for salt spray.
b. ASTM D2794 for minimum impact resistance of 100 in-lb. c. ASTM B3359 for crosshatch adhesion of 5B.

2. Application: Spray.

3. Thickness: 1 mil.

4. Gloss: Minimum gloss of 60 on a 60-degree meter.

2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. AHRI Compliance:

1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

2. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger.

B. AMCA Compliance:

1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA 311.

2. Damper leakage tested according to AMCA 500-D.

3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange installation of units to provide clear access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 13
100% Design Submittal
B. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to RTU, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to unit mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or roof drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

E. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.

3.4 DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.

2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb.

3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.

3.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Connect electrical wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate: laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate: laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs as layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.

3. Locate nameplate where easily visible.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 14
100% Design Submittal

3.6 CONTROL CONNECTIONS
A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

3. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.

4. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.

5. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans.

6. Inspect internal insulation.

7. Verify that labels are clearly visible.

8. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

9. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

10. Verify that filters are installed.

11. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris.

12. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.

13. Connect and purge gas line.

14. Remove packing from vibration isolators.

15. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

16. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete.

17. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected duct systems are in fully open position.

18. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers.

19. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.

20. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding.

B. Starting procedures for units include the following:

1. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

2. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system.
b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

3. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.

4. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.

5. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for peak efficiency:
a. Measure gas pressure on manifold.
b. Inspect operation of power vents.
c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 15
100% Design Submittal
d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration.
f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

6. Calibrate thermostats.

7. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

8. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.

9. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:
a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature.
d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

10. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.

11. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.

12. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage

13. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
a. Supply-air volume.
b. Return-air volume.
c. Relief-air volume.
d. Outdoor-air intake volume.

14. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air intake.

15. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes.

Inspect the following:
a. Low-temperature safety operation.
b. Filter high-pressure differential alarm.
c. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover.
d. Relief-air fan operation.
e. Smoke and fire stat alarms.

16. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Packaged Air-Conditioning Units Renovation & Expansion Final Design 237416 - 16
100% Design Submittal

3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.9 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTUs and airdistribution systems, clean RTUs internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs.

1. Instructor: factory trained and certified.

2. Provide not less than eight hours of training.

3. Train personnel in operation and maintenance and to obtain maximum efficiency in plant operation.

4. Provide instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that are coordinated with operation and maintenance manuals.

5. Obtain Owner sign-off that training is complete.

6. Owner training held at Project site.

7. Video record the training sessions and provide electronic copy to Owner.

END OF SECTION 237416
Division 26
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260010 - SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Supplemental requirements generally applicable to the Work specified in Division 26.

This Section is also referenced by related Work specified in other Divisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260010 “Supplemental Requirements for Electrical” for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section.

2. Division 03 “Concrete” for cast in place concrete work, including concrete encasements for electrical duct banks, equipment pads.

3. Division 31 “Earthwork” for excavation and backfilling, including gravel or sand bedding for underground work.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Electrical Terms and Units of Measure:

1. 8P8C: An 8-position 8-contact modular jack.

2. A: Ampere, unit of electrical current.

3. AC or ac: Alternating current.

4. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter.

5. AIC: Ampere interrupting capacity.

6. AL, Al, or ALUM: Aluminum.

7. ASD: Adjustable-speed drive.

8. ATS: Automatic transfer switch.

9. AWG: American wire gauge; see ASTM B258.

10. BAS: Building automation system.

11. BIL: Basic impulse insulation level.

12. BIM: Building information modeling.

13. CAD: Computer-aided design or drafting.

14. CATV: Community antenna television.

15. CB: Circuit breaker.

16. cd: Candela, the SI fundamental unit of luminous intensity.

17. CO/ALR: Copper-aluminum, revised.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 2
100% Design Submittal

18. COPS: Critical operations power system.

19. CU or Cu: Copper.

20. CU-AL or AL-CU: Copper-aluminum.

21. dB: Decibel, a unitless logarithmic ratio of two electrical, acoustical, or optical power values.

22. dB(A-weighted) or dB(A): Decibel acoustical sound pressure level with A-weighting applied in accordance with IEC 61672-1.

23. dB(adjusted) or dBa: Decibel weighted absolute noise power with respect to 3.16 pW (minus 85 dBm).

24. dBm: Decibel absolute power with respect to 1 mW.

25. DC or dc: Direct current.

26. DCOA: Designated critical operations area.

27. DDC: Direct digital control (HVAC).

28. EGC: Equipment grounding conductor.

29. ELV: Extra-low voltage.

30. EMF: Electromotive force.

31. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

32. EPM: Electrical preventive maintenance.

33. EPS: Emergency power supply.

34. EPSS: Emergency power supply system.

35. ESS: Energy storage system.

36. EV: Electric vehicle.

37. EVPE: Electric vehicle power export equipment.

38. EVSE: Electric vehicle supply equipment.

39. fc: Footcandle, an internationally recognized unit of illuminance equal to one lumen per square foot or 10.76 lx. The simplified conversion 1 fc = 10 lx in the Specifications is common practice and considered adequate precision for building construction activities.

When there are conflicts, lux is the primary unit; footcandle is specified for convenience.

40. FLC: Full-load current.

41. ft: Foot.

42. ft-cd: Foot-candle, the antiquated U.S. Standard unit of illuminance, equal to one international candle measured at a distance of one foot, that was superseded in 1948 by the unit "footcandle" after the SI unit candela (cd) replaced the international candle; see "fc,"

43. GEC: Grounding electrode conductor.

44. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

45. GFPE: Ground-fault protection of equipment.

46. GND: Ground.

47. HACR: Heating, air conditioning, and refrigeration.

48. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.

49. HID: High-intensity discharge.

50. HP or hp: Horsepower.

51. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.

52. Hz: Hertz.

53. IBT: Intersystem bonding termination.

54. inch: Inch. To avoid confusion, the abbreviation "in." is not used.

55. IP: Ingress protection rating (enclosures); Internet protocol (communications).

56. IR: Infrared.

57. IS: Intrinsically safe.

58. IT&R: Inspecting, testing, and repair.

59. ITE: Information technology equipment.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 3
100% Design Submittal

60. kAIC: Kiloampere interrupting capacity.

61. kcmil or MCM: One thousand circular mils.

62. kV: Kilovolt.

63. kVA: Kilovolt-ampere.

64. kVAr or kVAR: Kilovolt-ampere reactive.

65. kW: Kilowatt.

66. kWh: Kilowatt-hour.

67. LAN: Local area network.

68. lb: Pound (weight).

69. lbf: Pound (force).

70. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

71. LCDI: Leakage-current detector-interrupter.

72. LED: Light-emitting diode.

73. Li-ion: Lithium-ion.

74. lm: Lumen, the SI derived unit of luminous flux.

75. LNG: Liquefied natural gas.

76. LP-Gas: Liquefied petroleum gas.

77. LRC: Locked-rotor current.

78. LV: Low voltage.

79. lx: Lux, the SI derived unit of illuminance equal to one lumen per square meter.

80. m: Meter.

81. MCC: Motor-control center.

82. MDC: Modular data center.

83. MG set: Motor-generator set.

84. MIDI: Musical instrument digital interface.

85. MLO: Main lugs only.

86. MV: Medium voltage.

87. MVA: Megavolt-ampere.

88. mW: Milliwatt.

89. MW: Megawatt.

90. MWh: Megawatt-hour.

91. NC: Normally closed.

92. Ni-Cd: Nickel-cadmium.

93. Ni-MH: Nickel-metal hydride.

94. NIU: Network interface unit.

95. NO: Normally open.

96. NPT: National (American) standard pipe taper.

97. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

98. ONT: Optical network terminal.

99. PC: Personal computer.
100. PCS: Power conversion system.
101. PCU: Power-conditioning unit.
102. PF or pf: Power factor.
103. PHEV: Plug-in hybrid electric vehicle.
104. PLC: Programmable logic controller.
105. PLFA: Power-limited fire alarm.
106. PoE: Power over Ethernet.
107. PV: Photovoltaic.
108. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
109. pW: Picowatt.
110. RFI: (electrical) Radio-frequency interference; (contract) Request for interpretation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 4
100% Design Submittal
111. RMS or rms: Root-mean-square.
112. RPM or rpm: Revolutions per minute.
113. SCADA: Supervisory control and data acquisition.
114. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
115. SPD: Surge protective device.
116. sq.: Square.
117. SWD: Switching duty.
118. TCP/IP: Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol. 119. TEFC: Totally enclosed fan-cooled.
120. TR: Tamper resistant.
121. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
122. UL: (standards) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.; (product categories) UL, LLC. 123. UL CCN: UL Category Control Number.
124. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
125. USB: Universal serial bus.
126. UV: Ultraviolet.
127. V: Volt, unit of electromotive force.
128. V(ac): Volt, alternating current.
129. V(dc): Volt, direct current.
130. VA: Volt-ampere, unit of complex electrical power. 131. VAR: Volt-ampere reactive, unit of reactive electrical power. 132. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.
133. VFD: Variable-frequency drive.
134. VOM: Volt-ohm-multimeter.
135. VPN: Virtual private network.
136. VRLA: Valve regulated lead acid; also called "sealed lead acid (SLA)" or "valve regulated sealed lead acid."
137. W: Watt, unit of real electrical power.
138. Wh: Watt-hour, unit of electrical energy usage.
139. WPT: Wireless power transfer.
140. WPTE: Wireless power transfer equipment.
141. WR: Weather resistant.

B. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Electrical Raceway Types:

1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

2. EMT-A: Aluminum electrical metallic tubing.

3. EMT-S: Steel electrical metallic tubing.

4. EMT-SS: Stainless steel electrical metallic tubing.

5. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

6. EPEC: Electrical HDPE underground conduit (thin wall).

7. EPEC-A: Type A electrical HDPE underground conduit.

8. EPEC-B: Type B electrical HDPE underground conduit.

9. ERMC: Electrical rigid metal conduit.

10. ERMC-A: Aluminum electrical rigid metal conduit.

11. ERMC-S: Steel electrical rigid metal conduit.

12. ERMC-S-G: Galvanized-steel electrical rigid metal conduit.

13. ERMC-S-PVC: PVC-coated-steel electrical rigid metal conduit.

14. ERMC-SS: Stainless steel electrical rigid metal conduit.

15. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

16. FMC-A: Aluminum flexible metal conduit.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 5
100% Design Submittal

17. FMC-S: Steel flexible metal conduit.

18. FMT: Steel flexible metallic tubing.

19. FNMC: Flexible nonmetallic conduit. See "LFNC."

20. GRS: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

21. HDPE: HDPE underground conduit (thick wall).

22. HDPE-40: Schedule 40 HDPE underground conduit.

23. HDPE-80: Schedule 80 HDPE underground conduit.

24. IMC: Steel electrical intermediate metal conduit.

25. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

26. LFMC-A: Aluminum liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

27. LFMC-S: Steel liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

28. LFMC-SS: Stainless steel liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

29. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

30. LFNC-A: Layered (Type A) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

31. LFNC-B: Integral (Type B) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

32. LFNC-C: Corrugated (Type C) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

33. PVC: Rigid PVC conduit.

34. PVC-40: Schedule 40 rigid PVC conduit.

35. PVC-80: Schedule 80 rigid PVC Conduit.

36. PVC-A: Type A rigid PVC concrete-encased conduit.

37. PVC-EB: Type EB rigid PVC concrete-encased underground conduit.

38. RAC: Rigid aluminum conduit..

39. RGS: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. See ERMC-S-G.

40. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. See ERMC.

41. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.

42. RTRC-AG: Low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.

43. RTRC-AG-HW: Heavy wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.

44. RTRC-AG-SW: Standard wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.

45. RTRC-AG-XW: Extra heavy wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.

46. RTRC-BG: Low-halogen, belowground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.

C. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Electrical Single-Conductor and Multiple-Conductor Cable Types:

1. AC: Armored cable.

2. CATV: Coaxial general-purpose cable.

3. CATVP: Coaxial plenum cable.

4. CATVR: Coaxial riser cable.

5. CI: Circuit integrity cable.

6. CL2: Class 2 cable.

7. CL2P: Class 2 plenum cable.

8. CL2R: Class 2 riser cable.

9. CL2X: Class 2 cable, limited use.

10. CL3: Class 3 cable.

11. CL3P: Class 3 plenum cable.

12. CL3R: Class 3 riser cable.

13. CL3X: Class 3 cable, limited use.

14. CM: Communications general-purpose cable.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 6
100% Design Submittal

15. CMG: Communications general-purpose cable.

16. CMP: Communications plenum cable.

17. CMR: Communications riser cable.

18. CMUC: Under-carpet communications wire and cable.

19. CMX: Communications cable, limited use.

20. DG: Distributed generation cable.

21. FC: Flat cable.

22. FCC: Flat conductor cable.

23. FPL: Power-limited fire-alarm cable.

24. FPLP: Power-limited fire-alarm plenum cable.

25. FPLR: Power-limited fire-alarm riser cable.

26. IGS: Integrated gas spacer cable.

27. ITC: Instrumentation tray cable.

28. ITC-ER: Instrumentation tray cable, exposed run.

29. MC: Metal-clad cable.

30. MC-HL: Metal-clad cable, hazardous location.

31. MI: Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable.

32. MTW: (machine tool wiring) Moisture-, heat-, and oil-resistant thermoplastic cable.

33. MV: Medium-voltage cable.

34. NM: Nonmetallic sheathed cable.

35. NMC: Nonmetallic sheathed cable with corrosion-resistant nonmetallic jacket.

36. NMS: Nonmetallic sheathed cable with signaling, data, and communications conductors, plus power or control conductors.

37. NPLF: Non-power-limited fire-alarm circuit cable.

38. NPLFP: Non-power-limited fire-alarm circuit cable for environmental air spaces.

39. NPLFR: Non-power-limited fire-alarm circuit riser cable.

40. NUCC: Nonmetallic underground conduit with conductors.

41. OFC: Conductive optical fiber general-purpose cable.

42. OFCG: Conductive optical fiber general-purpose cable.

43. OFCP: Conductive optical fiber plenum cable.

44. OFCR: Conductive optical fiber riser cable.

45. OFN: Nonconductive optical fiber general-purpose cable.

46. OFNG: Nonconductive optical fiber general-purpose cable.

47. OFNP: Nonconductive optical fiber plenum cable.

48. OFNR: Nonconductive optical fiber riser cable.

49. P: Marine shipboard cable.

50. PLTC: Power-limited tray cable.

51. PLTC-ER: Power-limited tray cable, exposed run.

52. PV: Photovoltaic cable.

53. RHH: (high heat) Thermoset rubber, heat-resistant cable.

54. RHW: Thermoset rubber, moisture-resistant cable.

55. SA: Silicone rubber cable.

56. SE: Service-entrance cable.

57. SER: Service-entrance cable, round.

58. SEU: Service-entrance cable, flat.

59. SIS: Thermoset cable for switchboard and switchgear wiring.

60. TBS: Thermoplastic cable with outer braid.

61. TC: Tray cable.

62. TC-ER: Tray cable, exposed run.

63. TC-ER-HL: Tray cable, exposed run, hazardous location.

64. THW: Thermoplastic, heat- and moisture-resistant cable. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 7
100% Design Submittal

65. THHN: Thermoplastic, heat-resistant cable with nylon jacket outer sheath.

66. THHW: Thermoplastic, heat- and moisture-resistant cable.

67. THWN: Thermoplastic, moisture- and heat-resistant cable with nylon jacket outer sheath.

68. TW: Thermoplastic, moisture-resistant cable.

69. UF: Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.

70. USE: Underground service-entrance cable.

71. XHH: Cross-linked polyethylene, heat-resistant cable.

72. XHHW: Cross-linked polyethylene, heat- and moisture-resistant cable.

D. Definitions:

1. 8-Position 8-Contact (8P8C) Modular Jack: An unkeyed jack with up to eight contacts commonly used to terminate twisted-pair and multiconductor Ethernet cable. Also called a "TIA-1096 miniature 8-position series jack" (8PSJ), or an "IEC 8877 8-pole jack." a. Be careful when suppliers use "RJ45" generically. Obsolete RJ45 jacks used for analog telephone cables have rejection keys. 8P8C jacks used for digital telephone cables and Ethernet cables do not have rejection keys.

2. Basic Impulse Insulation Level (BIL): Reference insulation level expressed in impulse crest voltage with a standard wave not longer than 1.5 times 50 microseconds and 1.5 times 40 microseconds.

3. Cable: In accordance with NIST NBS Circular 37 and IEEE standards, in the United States for the purpose of interstate commerce, the definition of "cable" is (1) a conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with or without insulation (single-conductor cable); or (2) a combination of conductors insulated from one another (multipleconductor cable).

4. Communications Jack: A fixed connecting device designed for insertion of a communications cable plug.

5. Communications Outlet: One or more communications jacks, or cables and plugs, mounted in a box or ring, with a suitable protective cover.

6. Conductor: In accordance with NIST NBS Circular 37 and IEEE standards, in the United States for the purpose of interstate commerce, the definition of "conductor" is (1) a wire or combination of wires not insulated from one another, suitable for carrying an electric current; (2) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) a material, usually in the form of wire, cable, or bar, suitable for carrying an electric current; or (3) (general) a substance or body that allows a current of electricity to pass continuously along it.

7. Designated Seismic System: A system component that requires design in accordance with Ch. 13 of ASCE/SEI 7 and for which the Component Importance Factor is greater than

1.0. 8. Direct Buried: Installed underground without encasement in concrete or other protective material.

9. Enclosure: The case or housing of an apparatus, or the fence or wall(s) surrounding an installation, to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts or to protect the equipment from physical damage. Types of enclosures and enclosure covers include the following:
a. Cabinet: An enclosure that is designed for either surface mounting or flush mounting and is provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or can be hung.
b. Concrete Box: A box intended for use in poured concrete. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 8
100% Design Submittal
c. Conduit Body: A means for providing access to the interior of a conduit or tubing system through one or more removable covers at a junction or terminal point. In the United States, conduit bodies are listed in accordance with outlet box requirements.
d. Conduit Box: A box having threaded openings or knockouts for conduit, EMT, or fittings.
e. Cutout Box: An enclosure designed for surface mounting that has swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the enclosure. f. Device Box: A box with provisions for mounting a wiring device directly to the box.
g. Extension Ring: A ring intended to extend the sides of an outlet box or device box to increase the box depth, volume, or both.
h. Floor Box: A box mounted in the floor intended for use with a floor box cover and other components to complete the floor box enclosure.
i. Floor-Mounted Enclosure: A floor box and floor box cover assembly with means to mount in the floor that is sealed against the entrance of scrub water at the floor level.
j. Floor Nozzle: An enclosure used on a wiring system, intended primarily as a housing for a receptacle, provided with a means, such as a collar, for surfacemounting on a floor, which may or may not include a stem to support it above the floor level, and is sealed against the entrance of scrub water at the floor level. k. Junction Box: A box with a blank cover that joins different runs of raceway or cable and provides space for connection and branching of the enclosed conductors. l. Outlet Box: A box that provides access to a wiring system having pryout openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides or the back, or both, for the entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting an outlet box cover, but without provisions for mounting a wiring device directly to the box.
m. Pedestal Floor Box Cover: A floor box cover that, when installed as intended, provides a means for typically vertical or near-vertical mounting of receptacle outlets above the floor's finished surface.
n. Pull Box: A box with a blank cover that joins different runs of raceway and provides access for pulling or replacing the enclosed cables or conductors. o. Raised-Floor Box: A floor box intended for use in raised floors. p. Recessed Access Floor Box: A floor box with provisions for mounting wiring devices below the floor surface.
q. Recessed Access Floor Box Cover: A floor box cover with provisions for passage of cords to recessed wiring devices mounted within a recessed floor box. r. Ring: A sleeve, which is not necessarily round, used for positioning a recessed wiring device flush with the plaster, concrete, drywall, or other wall surface. s. Ring Cover: A box cover, with raised center portion to accommodate a specific wall or ceiling thickness, for mounting wiring devices or luminaires flush with the surface.
t. Termination Box: An enclosure designed for installation of termination base assemblies consisting of bus bars, terminal strips, or terminal blocks with provision for wire connectors to accommodate incoming or outgoing conductors, or both.

10. Emergency Systems: Those systems legally required and classed as emergency by municipal, state, federal, or other codes, or by any governmental agency having jurisdiction that are designed to ensure continuity of lighting, electrical power, or both, to ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 9
100% Design Submittal
designated areas and equipment in the event of failure of the normal supply for safety to human life.

11. Fault Limited: Providing or being served by a source of electrical power that is limited to not more than 100 W when tested in accordance with UL 62368-1. a. The term "fault limited" is intended to encompass most Class 1, 2, and 3 powerlimited sources complying with Article 725 of NFPA 70; Class ES1 and ES2 electrical energy sources that are Class PS1 electrical power sources (e.g., USB); and Class ES3 electrical energy sources that are Class PS1 and PS2 electrical power sources (e.g., PoE). See UL 62368-1 for discussion of classes of electrical energy sources and classes of electrical power sources.

12. Jacket: A continuous nonmetallic outer covering for conductors or cables.

13. Luminaire: A complete lighting unit consisting of a light source such as a lamp, together with the parts designed to position the light source and connect it to the power supply. It may also include parts to protect the light source or the ballast or to distribute the light.

14. Mode: The terms "Active Mode," "Off Mode," and "Standby Mode" are used as defined in the Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA) of 2007.

15. Multi-Outlet Assembly: A type of surface, flush, or freestanding raceway designed to hold conductors, receptacles, and switches, assembled in the field or at the factory.

16. Plenum: A compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts are connected and that forms part of the air distribution system.

17. Receptacle: A fixed connecting device arranged for insertion of a power cord plug. Also called a power jack.

18. Receptacle Outlet: One or more receptacles mounted in a box with a suitable protective cover.

19. Sheath: A continuous metallic covering for conductors or cables.

20. UL Category Control Number (CCN): An alphabetic or alphanumeric code used to identify product categories covered by UL's Listing, Classification, and Recognition Services.

21. Voltage Class: For specified circuits and equipment, voltage classes are defined as follows:
a. Control Voltage: Having electromotive force between any two conductors, or between a single conductor and ground, that is supplied from a battery or other Class 2 or Class 3 power-limited source.
b. Line Voltage: (1) (controls) Designed to operate using the supplied low-voltage power without transformation. (2) (transmission lines, transformers, SPDs) The line-to-line voltage of the supplying power system.
c. Extra-Low Voltage (ELV): Not having electromotive force between any two conductors, or between a single conductor and ground, exceeding 30 V(ac rms), 42 V(ac peak), or 60 V(dc).
d. Low Voltage (LV): Having electromotive force between any two conductors, or between a single conductor and ground, that is rated above 30 V but not exceeding 1000 V.

22. Wire: In accordance with NIST NBS Circular 37 and IEEE standards, in the United States for the purpose of interstate commerce, the definition of "wire" is a slender rod or filament of drawn metal. A group of small wires used as a single wire is properly called a "stranded wire." A wire or stranded wire covered with insulation is properly called an ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 10
100% Design Submittal
"insulated wire" or a "single-conductor cable." Nevertheless, when the context indicates that the wire is insulated, the term "wire" will be understood to include the insulation.

1.4 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. If during performance of work, there is a conflict, error, or discrepancy between or among Contract Documents and laws and regulations, provide the higher performance standard unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

B. Priority of Documents: Figured dimensions govern over scaled dimensions, detailed drawings govern over general drawing, larger scale drawings take precedence over smaller scale drawings, change order drawings supersede original contract drawings, and contract drawings govern shop drawings.

C. In general, Drawings do not show conduit routing. Plan and route conduits in compliance with specifications and drawing details. Coordinate installation with other trades and actual supplied equipment.

D. Ductbank routing shown on electrical site plans is diagrammatic in nature and may not include interferences that may be present. Prior to excavation, hydrovac the area of ductbank route.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

B. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.Arrange to provide temporary electrical power with coordination with Owner. Refer to drawing construction sheet E-12 for details.

1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Schedule Preconstruction Meeting and other Preinstallation Meetings in accordance with Project Meetings Section in Division 01.

1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Conduct and submit results of preliminary power system studies before submitting Product Data and Shop Drawings for electrical equipment.

B. Coordinate installation work with other trades.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 11
100% Design Submittal

1.8 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings for Structural Supports: Show coordination of structural supports for equipment and devices, including restraints and bracing for control of seismic and wind loads, with other systems, equipment, and structural supports in the vicinity.

B. Coordination Drawings for Ceiling Areas: Where indicated on drawings, provide reflected ceiling plan(s), supplemented by sections and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which equipment and suspension systems will be attached.

3. Size and location of access panels on ceilings.

4. Elevation, size, and route of sprinkler piping.

5. Elevation, size, and route of plumbing piping.

6. Elevation, size, and route of ductwork.

7. Elevation, size, and route of conduit.

8. Elevation and size of wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted equipment.

9. Access panels.

10. Sprinklers.

11. Air inlets and outlets.

12. Control modules.

13. Luminaires.

14. Communications devices.

15. Speakers.

16. Security devices.

17. Fire-alarm devices.

18. Indicate clear dimensions for maintenance access in front of equipment.

19. Indicate dimensions of fully-open access doors.

20. Relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements.

21. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

22. Elevation and size of sleeves for wall, ceiling, and floor cable penetrations.

23. Elevation of ceilings and size of ceiling tiles.

24. Locations of access panels on ceilings.

25. Locations of access panels on ductwork.

C. Coordination Drawings for Large Equipment Indoor Installations:

1. Location plan, drawn to scale, showing heavy equipment. Indicate available width and height of doors or openings.

2. Floor plan for entry floor and floor where equipment is located, drawn to scale, showing heavy equipment access paths for maintenance and replacement, with the following items shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
a. Dimensioned concrete bases, outlines of equipment, conduit entries, and grounding equipment locations.
b. Dimensioned working clearances and dedicated areas below and around electrical equipment where obstructions and tripping hazards are prohibited. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 12
100% Design Submittal

3. Reflected ceiling plans for entry floor and floor where equipment is located, drawn to scale, on which the following items shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
a. Support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Locate structural supports for structure-supported raceways and seismic bracing. b. Location of lighting fixtures, sprinkler piping and sprinklers, ducts and diffusers, and other obstructions, indicating available overhead clearance. c. Dimensioned working clearances and dedicated areas above and around electrical equipment where foreign systems and equipment are prohibited.

D. Coordination Drawings for Large Equipment Outdoor Installations:

1. Utilities site plan, drawn to scale, showing heavy equipment or truck access paths with the following items shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
a. Fences and walls, dimensioned concrete bases, outlines of equipment, conduit entries, and grounding and bonding locations.
b. Indicate clear dimensions for wall openings.
c. Indicate depth and type of ground cover, and locations of trees, shrubbery, and other obstructions in access path.
d. Dimensioned working clearances and dedicated areas around electrical equipment.

E. Submit Division 26 equipment and materials as specified in each Section at one time and not piecemeal. For example, all low voltage panelboards on a project are to be submitted under one submittal number. Submittals that do not comply will be returned disapproved.

F. Subject to Engineer’s approval, related items may be submitted together under one submittal.

Contractor shall identify the multiple Sections included. For example, multiple Sections specify lighting fixtures. A single submittal for lighting could be acceptable.

G. Electrical Installation Drawings:

1. Drawings in general do not show conduit routing other than major conduit and ductbank routes. Submit conduit layouts for exposed, concealed, and buried conduits.

2. Submit electrical room layouts using approved shop drawing dimensions for equipment.

3. Submit layouts at an appropriate scale for clarity.

4. Include type written conduit schedules for easy cross check.

5. Installation submittal drawing must be approved before concrete pours are made that will conceal conduits.

H. Coordination Drawings for Duct Banks:

1. Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.

2. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings.

I. Training Plans: Submit instructional program outline for Engineer’s review and approval, where demonstration and/or training is specified.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 13
100% Design Submittal

1.9 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Electrical Installation Schedule: At preconstruction meeting, and periodically thereafter as dates change, provide schedule for electrical installation Work to Owner and Engineer including, but not limited to, milestone dates for the following activities:

1. Submission of power system studies.

2. Submission of specified coordination drawings.

3. Submission of action submittals specified in Division 26.

4. Orders placed for major electrical equipment.

5. Arrival of major electrical equipment on-site.

6. Preinstallation meetings specified in Division 26.

7. Utility service outages.

8. Utility service inspection and activation.

9. Closing of walls and ceilings containing electrical Work.

10. System startup, testing, and commissioning activities for major electrical equipment.

11. System startup, testing, and commissioning activities for emergency lighting.

12. System startup, testing, and commissioning activities for automation systems (SCADA, BMS, lighting, HVAC, fire alarm, fire pump, etc.).

13. Pouring of concrete housekeeping pads for electrical equipment and testing of concrete samples.

14. Requests for special inspections.

15. Requests for inspections by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Delegated Design Drawings: As indicated in individual Division 26 Sections.

C. Delegated Design Drawings for Structural Masonry Wall Penetrations: Where indicated on Drawings, provide reflected ceiling plan(s), supplemented by elevations, sections, and other details, drawn to scale, signed and sealed by a qualified structural professional engineer, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Location and dimensions of structural members supporting wall.

2. Location and dimensions of columns near penetrations.

3. Location and dimension of headers and lintels.

4. Doors and windows near penetrations.

5. Location and dimensions of penetrating cuts.

6. Sprinkler piping and sleeves.

7. Plumbing piping and sleeves.

8. Ductwork and sleeves.

9. Cable tray and sleeves.

10. Conduit and sleeves.

11. Firestopping assemblies for rated penetrations.

12. Structural supports for piping, ductwork, and conduit on both sides of wall.

13. The following systems and components are Designated Seismic Systems and require written special certification of seismic qualification by manufacturer:
a. Hangers and supports specified in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 14
100% Design Submittal
b. Conduits and their mounting provisions specified in Section 260533.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems."
c. Boxes and their mounting provisions specified in Section 260533.16 "Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems."
d. Surface raceways and their mounting provisions specified in Section 260533.23 "Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems."
e. Equipment, accessories, and components specified in Section 262213 "LowVoltage Distribution Transformers." f. Equipment, accessories, and components specified in Section 262413 "Switchboards."
g. Equipment, accessories, and components specified in Section 262416 "Panelboards."
h. Cabinets, enclosures, racks, and their mounting provisions specified in Section 262716 "Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures."
i. Equipment, accessories, and components specified in Section 262816 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers."
j. Luminaires, accessories, and components specified in Section 265000 “Lighting”.

1.10 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Documents: Submit documentation to accurately show completed installation. Include modifications to Contract Documents (one line power diagrams, equipment elevations, panel schedules, elementary control diagrams, riser diagrams, plans, conduit and ductbank routing, etc.) along with additional drawings or sketches created to convey completed installation.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Provide emergency operation, normal operation, and preventive maintenance manuals for each system, equipment, and device as specified in each Division 26 Sections.

1.11 DELEGATED DESIGN / PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES A. When engineering services are specified to be provided by Contractor, retain a licensed professional engineer to perform the services. Engineer shall be licensed at the time services are performed and licensed in the state in which project is located. If the state issues discipline specific licenses, Engineer shall be licensed in the applicable discipline. Engineer shall be experienced in the type of work being performed.

B. Engineering work shall be done according to the applicable regulations for professional engineers to include signing, sealing, and dating documents.

1.12 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Comply with Quality Assurance Articles within each Division 26 Section.

B. Electrical Contractor Minimum Requirements: Regularly engaged in construction and corresponding installation within industrial and commercial sites for a minimum period of 10 years.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 15
100% Design Submittal
C. On Site Field Superintendent:

1. Minimum of 10 years of experience of industrial low voltage projects of comparable size and complexity.

2. Be present (or designated substitute with minimum experience as above) during medium voltage cable pulling and testing, during medium voltage switching activity, and during medium voltage equipment change over or start-up activities.

D. Power Quality Specialist: Recognized experts possessing active credentials from a qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and able to present unexpired NICET Level 4 credentials with documented experience in power quality testing for installations similar in complexity to this Project.

E. Low-Voltage Electrical Testing and Inspecting Agency: Entities possessing active credentials from a qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. On-site electrical testing supervisors must have documented certification and experience with testing electrical equipment in accordance with NETA testing standards.

F. Power-Limited Electrical Testing Agency: Entity possessing active credentials from a qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. On-site power-limited testing supervisor must have BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer certification and documented training and experience with testing power-limited equipment in accordance with NETA testing standards.

1.13 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide new materials and equipment unless specifically noted otherwise.

B. NEMA enclosure types are listed on the Drawings and/or the specifications.

C. Electrical materials and equipment must be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and bear the appropriate listing or classification marking. Equipment not bearing a UL certification shall be field or factor UL certified prior to acceptance and use.

D. Provide major electrical equipment by a single manufacturer, i.e. switchgear, motor control centers, disconnect switches, transformers, panelboards, etc.

E. Variable frequency controllers, when provided as a stand-alone package with the driven equipment and therefore not included in a motor control center shall be by a single manufacturer.

1.14 EQUIPMENT SIZE, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Coordinate with equipment manufacturer shipping splits to permit safe handling and passage of equipment to final installation location.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for upright equipment orientation during transportation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 16
100% Design Submittal
C. Protect equipment from mechanical injury, or exposure to moisture, chemicals, or corrosive gases. Do not store indoor rated electrical equipment outdoors.

D. Provide and energize temporary space heaters if required to control moisture during storage.

1.15 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions for Electrical Power Equipment: specified electrical power equipment must be suitable for operation under service conditions specified as usual service conditions in applicable NEMA PB series, IEEE C37 series, and IEEE C57 series standards.

1.16 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TESTING AND SETTINGS
A. Test electrical systems and equipment in accordance with specified in each individual Division 26 Sections and Section 260800 “Commissioning of Electrical Systems”. This includes motors or other electrical equipment which are not specified in Division 26.

B. Set and adjust controls, timers, relays, adjustable trip units, protective devices, and other electrical components in accordance with manufacturers instructions and the approved power system study. Do not energize equipment without correctly setting adjustable components.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS
A. Provide and place sleeves for conduits and slots for electrical work prior to concrete pour.

B. Use approved shop drawings and equipment vendor templates to determine exact locations for stub-ups and terminating concealed conduit and place before floor slab pour.

C. Seal openings, sleeves, penetration and slots in accordance with Section 260544 “Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling.”

2.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut and patch in a workmanlike manner as required to install electrical work.

B. Modify concrete in accordance with Division 3 “Concrete.” C. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, columns, or other structural members.

D. Patch surfaces to restore to original integrity (waterproof or fireproof as required) and appearance.

E. Core drill holes in concrete floors and walls as required. Prior to coring concrete, scan slab or wall using radar to locate and identify rebar and/or conduit and wiring. Locate cores to avoid cutting or drilling through rebar and/or conduits. Space conduits to not weaken structural ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 17
100% Design Submittal
integrity. Notify Engineer immediately if rebar is cut or upon becoming aware of discrepancies within area of work.

2.3 DEMOLITION AND DISPOSITION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Drawings showing removal of major mechanical and electrical equipment is not intended to show all components to be demolished. Not all piping, conduits, ducts, equipment, ancillary devices, etc. are shown. Field verify existing conditions prior to bid.

B. Unless otherwise specifically noted, remove unused exposed conduit and support systems back to source and/or point of concealment including above accessible ceiling finishes. Wiring shall be removed.

C. Cut flush with slab, ceiling, or wall abandoned concealed conduit. Suitably plug conduits.

D. Repair and restore adjacent construction and finishes after demolition is complete.

E. Material and equipment indicated for removal or demolition is to become the Contractor’s property upon removal, unless noted otherwise. Removed material to be properly handled and disposed.

2.4 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in the Contract Documents or manufacturers' written instructions, comply with NFPA 70 and NECA NEIS 1 for installation of Work specified in Division 26. Consult Engineer for resolution of conflicting requirements.

2.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field testing, startup services, and system functional testing may be provided by the Contractor, and/or the manufacturer’s factory-authorized service representative, and/or an independent testing agency. Provide testing and/or startup service as specified in the relevant section.

B. Comply with Section 260800 “Commissioning of Electrical Systems.” C. Submit Field Quality-Control Report as informational submittal within 14 days of each completed test or startup. Include within the report adjustments / as left settings.

2.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Administrant for Low-Voltage Electrical Tests and Inspections: Engage factoryauthorized service representative to administer and perform tests and inspections on components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Administrant for Power-Limited Electrical Tests and Inspections:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Supplemental Requirements for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260010 - 18
100% Design Submittal

1. Engage factory-authorized service representative to administer and perform tests and inspections on components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Administrant for Structural Tests and Inspections:

1. Engage factory-authorized service representative to administer and perform tests and inspections on components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Administrant for Field Tests and Inspections of Lighting Installations:

1. Administer and perform tests and inspections with assistance of factory-authorized service representative.

2.7 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish and debris from inside and around electrical equipment and enclosures.

B. Remove dirt, dust or concrete spatter from interior and exterior of equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air.

C. Waste Management:

D. Dispose all electrical and Control equipment as per Design Drawings.

2.8 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Provide demonstration and training as specified in each Division 26 Sections.

END OF SECTION 260010
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260505 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Removal of existing electrical equipment, wiring, and conduit in areas to be remodeled; removal of designated construction; dismantling, cutting and alterations for completion of the Work.

2. Disposal of materials.

3. Storage of removed materials.

4. Identification of utilities.

5. Salvaged items.

6. Relocate existing equipment to accommodate construction.

B. Related Sections:

2. Section 260011 "Facility Performance Requirements for Electrical" for seismic-load, wind-load, acoustical, and other field conditions applicable to Work specified in this Section.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable items; location and construction of temporary work. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of capped utilities conduits and equipment abandoned in place.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with owner’s standards. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260505 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule work to coincide with new construction.

B. Perform noisy, malodorous, dusty, work:

1. Between hours of 8:00 A.M. and 5:00 P.M..

C. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify Engineer/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.

B. Coordinate demolition work with Owner..

C. Coordinate and sequence demolition so as not to cause shutdown of operation of surrounding areas.

D. Equipment, building or structures scheduled for complete demolition shall be made safe from electrical shock hazard prior to demolition.

E. Shut-down Periods:

1. Arrange timing of shut-down periods of in-service panels with Owner. Do not shut down any utility without prior written approval.

2. Keep shut-down period to minimum or use intermittent period as directed by Owner.

3. Maintain life-safety systems in full operation in occupied facilities or provide notice minimum 3 days in advance.

F. Identify salvage items in cooperation with Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017300 “Execution”: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify wiring and equipment indicated to be demolished serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Verify termination points for demolished services.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260505 - 3
100% Design Submittal

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Erect, and maintain temporary safeguards, including warning signs and lights, barricades, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor's employees, and existing improvements to remain.

B. Temporary egress signage and emergency lighting

3.3 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEGALLY REGULATED MATERIALS A. Material and equipment indicated to be removed and disposed of will become the Contractor's property. Dispose of material and equipment offsite, unless otherwise directed by the Owner.

Provide the Owner with a receipt indicating the acceptable disposal of any legally regulated materials or equipment.

B. Assume that the ballasts in each existing lighting fixture contain PCBs, unless specifically marked with a label indicating "No PCBs." Remove ballasts from each lighting fixture and pack them in accordance with EPA PCB regulations. Ship ballasts in approved containers to an EPA approved recycling facility; pay all shipping, packaging and recycling costs.

C. Remove, package, ship and dispose of PCBs, mercury and PCB/mercury contaminated equipment, in accordance with all State and Federal regulations. Retain the services of a firm licensed and regularly engaged in the removal of PCBs and PCB contaminated equipment.

Retain a firm licensed in the State or States in which the contaminated material is handled, shipped and disposed of. Pay all fees associated with the removal of the contaminated material and equipment. Submit documentation indicating acceptable disposal.

D. If PCBs or mercury contaminated equipment are discovered that were not identified; cease work on or about the equipment and notify the Engineer immediately.

E. Remove the following electrical equipment to a location on the site for storage as directed by the Owner:

3.4 DEMOLITION
A. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.

Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation.

B. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

C. Remove conduit, wire, boxes, and fastening devices to avoid any interference with new installation.

D. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

E. Reconnect equipment being disturbed by renovation work and required for continue service to Temporary MCC or nearest available panel.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260505 - 4
100% Design Submittal
F. Disconnect or shut off service to areas where electrical work is to be removed. Remove electrical fixtures, equipment, and related switches, outlets, conduit and wiring which are not part of final project.

G. Install temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.

H. Perform work on energized equipment or circuits with experienced and trained personnel.

I. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

J. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

K. Remove exposed abandoned grounding and bonding components, fasteners and supports, and electrical identification components, ,including abandoned components above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut embedded support elements flush with walls and floors.

L. Clean and repair existing equipment to remain or to be reinstalled.

M. Protect and retain power to existing active equipment remaining.

N. Cap abandoned empty conduit at both ends.

3.5 EXISTING PANELBOARDS
A. Ring out circuits in existing panel affected by the Work. Where additional circuits are needed, reuse circuits available for reuse. Install new breakers.

B. Tag unused circuits as spare.

C. Where existing circuits are indicated to be reused, use sensing measuring devices to verify circuits feeding Project area or are not in use.

D. Remove existing wire no longer in use from panel to equipment.

E. Provide new updated directories where more than three circuits have been modified or rewired.

3.6 SALVAGE ITEMS
A. Remove and protect items indicated on Drawings in Schedule to be salvaged and turn over to Owner.

B. Items of salvageable value may be removed as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.

3.7 REUSABLE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Carefully remove equipment, materials, or fixtures which are to be reused. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260505 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. Disconnect, remove, or relocate existing electrical material and equipment interfering with new installation.

C. Relocate existing lighting fixtures as indicated on Drawings. Clean fixtures and re-lamp. Test fixture to see if it is in good working condition before installation at new location.

3.8 CLEANING
A. Remove demolished materials as work progresses. Legally dispose.

B. Keep the workplace neat.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface..

END OF SECTION 260505
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition for Electrical Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260505 - 6
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260519 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Copper building wire.

2. Fire-alarm wire and cable.

3. Connectors and splices.

B. Related Requirements:

2. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. VFC: Variable-frequency controller. Used interchangeably with VFD.

B. VFD: Variable frequency drive. See VFC.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s cut sheet for each type of product used on project “or equal.” B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260519 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: :

1. Alpha Wire; brand of Belden, Inc.

2. Okonite Company (The).

3. Southwire Company, LLC.

4. Or approved equal.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

2. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors.

E. Stranding: Refer to CONDUCTOR APPLICATIONS Article in PART 3.

F. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277.

2. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

3. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

G. Shield:

1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260519 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2.2 FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Allied Wire & Cable Inc.

2. Comtran Corporation.

3. Prysmian Cables and Systems; Prysmian Group North America.

4. Superior Essex Inc.; subsidiary of LS Corp.

5. Or approved equal.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire-alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a two-hour rating.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600 V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a two-hour rating.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum, in pathway.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum, in pathway.

3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire-alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. 3M Electrical Products.

2. AFC Cable Systems; Atkore International.

3. Gardner Bender.

4. Ideal Industries, Inc.

5. ILSCO.

6. Or approved equal
C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260519 - 4
100% Design Submittal
D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Tin-plated copper.

2. Type:
a. One hole with standard barrels for No. 8 AWG to No. 4/0 AWG. b. Two holes with long barrels for 250 kcmil and larger. c. Locking spade for No. 10 AWG and smaller.

3. Termination: Compression for No. 8 AWG and larger.

E. Connectors:

1. Solderless pressure type (wire nuts) for No. 10 AWG and smaller.

2. Pre-filled with silicone-based sealant for exterior, wet, or corrosive locations.

3. Split bolt type for No. 8 AWG and larger splices.

F. Motor Terminations: Mechanical compression ring type, secured with bolt, nut and spring washer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Wires and Cables: Copper; stranded, except for lighting and receptacle wiring which may be solid. Minimum size for power circuits: No. 12 AWG.

B. Nominal 480/277VAC Power Circuits: Single conductors in raceway. Type XHHW-2 for sizes up to 4/0 and Type RHW-2 for size 250 kcmil and larger.

C. Nominal 240/208/120V Power Circuits: Single conductors in raceway. Type XHHW-2 for No. 8 and larger, Type THHN/THWN-2 for No. 10 AWG and smaller.

D. Direct Burial Outdoor Lighting Circuits: Type RHW-2.

E. Grounding Conductors: Refer to Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”
F. and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wiremesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

G. VFD Output Circuits: Type TC-ER with shield.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260519 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points in accordance with Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Use of steel fish tapes and/or steel pulling cables in PVC conduit or raceways that terminate into energized enclosures is prohibited.

F. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible.

G. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-ALARM WIRING
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal pathway according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems."

1. Install plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings.

2. Install fire-alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system in a dedicated pathway system. Do not use this system for any other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method:

1. Cables and pathways used for fire-alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of two-hour, fire-rated fire-alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is permitted.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Do not install power-limited fire-alarm cables in the same cable or pathway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.

Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire-alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; cabinets; or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260519 - 6
100% Design Submittal
F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire-alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Colorcode audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire-alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire-alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1 inch conduit between the fire-alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. Do not splice service or feeder cables without prior written approval of Engineer.

C. Wiring at Outlets:

1. Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inch of slack.

2. Form solid wire into loop to fit around device terminal screw. Do not overlap wire.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260519 - 7
100% Design Submittal

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance, and feeder conductors, and 480V power circuit conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:
a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.
b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:
1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.
c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification.
e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.
f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors.

Apply a potential of 1000 V(dc) for 600 V rated cable for a one-minute duration.

Minimum wire insulation resistance: 100 Megohms.
g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.
h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION 260519
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260519 - 8
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Grounding and bonding conductors.

2. Grounding and bonding materials and hardware.

3. Grounding and bonding clamps.

4. Grounding and bonding bushings.

5. Grounding and bonding hubs.

6. Grounding and bonding connectors.

7. Intersystem bonding bridge grounding connector.

8. Grounding and bonding busbars.

9. Signal reference grids.

10. Grounding (earthing) electrodes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260010 "Supplemental Requirements for Electrical" for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on the project.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells.

2. Ground rods.

3. Ground rings.

4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 2
100% Design Submittal
C. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. In addition to items specified in Section 260010 "Supplemental Requirements for Electrical," include the following:
a. Plans showing locations of grounding features described in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1) Test wells.
2) Rod electrodes.
3) Ring electrodes.
4) Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. b. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells ring electrodes, and grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS.
1) Tests must determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions must recommend corrective action if values do not.
2) Include recommended testing intervals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Grounding and Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor, 600V with insulation type matching the circuit phase conductors called for in Section 260519 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” green color.

B. ASTM - Bare Copper Grounding and Bonding Conductor:

1. Referenced Standards: Complying with one or more of the following:
a. Soft or Annealed Copper Wire: ASTM B3.
b. Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductor: ASTM B8.
c. Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire: ASTM B33.
d. 19-Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductor: ASTM B787/B787M. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING MATERIALS AND HARDWARE
A. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467. b. Grounding and Bonding Equipment for Communications: UL CCN KDSH; including UL 467.

B. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel, 3/4-inch by 10-feet, sectionalized as required by Drawings.

C. Grounding Conduit Hubs: Malleable iron type.

D. Water Pipe Ground Clamps: Cast bronze saddle type.

E. Exothermic-welding Kits: CADWELD process or equal.

1. Manufacturer kits to include molds and powder recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2. Welds used indoors in occupied buildings or confined space to be low emission type, CADWELD EXOLON or equal.

F. Ground Rod Test Wells: As detailed on the Drawings.

G. Ground Enhancement Material (GEM): Low-resistance, non-corrosive, carbon dust-based material that improves grounding effectiveness. Contains cement, which hardens when set to provide a permanent, maintenance-free, low-resistant grounding system that never leaches or washes away. Suitable for installation in trenches or backfilling around ground rods. Resistivity of no more than 20 ohm-cm in cured state. ERICO Part No. GEM25A or equal.

H. Bus Bars: Rectangular bar of annealed copper. As detailed on the Drawings.

2.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING CLAMPS
A. Description: Clamps suitable for attachment of grounding and bonding conductors to grounding electrodes, pipes, tubing, and rebar. Grounding and bonding clamps specified in this article are also suitable for use with communications applications.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single manufacturer. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467. b. Grounding and Bonding Equipment for Communications: UL CCN KDSH; including UL 467.

D. UL KDER and KDSH - Hex-Fitting-Type Pipe and Rod Grounding and Bonding Clamp:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Arlington Industries, Inc.
c. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
d. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
e. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. f. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics:
a. Two pieces with stainless steel bolts.
b. Clamp Material: Tinned brass.
c. Listed for outdoor use.

E. UL KDER and KDSH - U-Bolt-Type Pipe and Rod Grounding and Bonding Clamp.

2. General Characteristics:
a. Clamp Material: Tinned brass.
b. Listed for outdoor use.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 5
100% Design Submittal
F. UL KDER and KDSH - Strap-Type Pipe and Rod Grounding and Bonding Clamp.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
e. Panduit Corp.
f. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics:
a. Clamp Material: Tinned copper.
b. Listed for outdoor use.

G. UL KDER - Beam Grounding and Bonding Clamp.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Panduit Corp.
c. Penn-Union Corp.; subsidiary of Nesco, Inc.
d. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. e. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Mechanical-type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions; with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

H. UL KDER - Exothermically Welded Connection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. e. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

I. UL KDER - Raised-Floor Signal Reference Grid Clamp:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 6
100% Design Submittal
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. c. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
d. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
e. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Mechanical-type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw.

2.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING BUSHINGS
A. Description: Bonding bushings connect conduit fittings, tubing fittings, threaded metal conduit, and unthreaded metal conduit to metal boxes and equipment enclosures and have one or more bonding screws intended to provide electrical continuity between bushing and enclosure.

Grounding bushings have provision for connection of bonding or grounding conductor and may or may not also have bonding screws.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single manufacturer.

C. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467.

D. UL KDER - Bonding Bushing:

2. General Characteristics: Threaded bushing with insulated throat.

E. UL KDER - Grounding Bushing:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Arlington Industries, Inc.
c. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 7
100% Design Submittal
d. Killark; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. e. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Threaded bushing with insulated throat and mechanical-type wire terminal.

2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING HUBS
A. Description: Hubs with certified grounding or bonding locknut.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single manufacturer.

C. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467.

D. UL KDER - Grounding and Bonding Hub:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Arlington Industries, Inc.
c. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. d. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
e. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Insulated, gasketed, watertight hub with mechanical-type wire terminal.

2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONNECTORS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single manufacturer.

B. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements:
a. Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 8
100% Design Submittal

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467. b. Grounding and Bonding Equipment for Communications: UL CCN KDSH; including UL 467.

C. UL KDER - Pressure-Type Grounding and Bonding Busbar Cable Connector:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. c. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Copper or copper alloy, for compression bonding of one or more conductor directly to copper busbar. Listed for direct burial.

D. UL KDER - Lay-In Lug Mechanical-Type Grounding and Bonding Busbar Terminal:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. ILSCO.
c. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. d. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Mechanical-type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.

E. UL KDER - Crimped Lug Pressure-Type Grounding and Bonding Busbar Terminal:

2. General Characteristics: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals; with long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8 or 1 inch centers for two-bolt connection to busbar.

F. UL KDER - Split-Bolt Service-Post Pressure-Type Grounding and Bonding Busbar Terminal:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Panduit Corp.
b. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 9
100% Design Submittal
c. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Bolts that surround cable and bond to cable under compression when nut is tightened after assembly is screwed into busbar opening.

G. UL KDER - Crimped Pressure-Type Grounding and Bonding Cable Connector:

2. General Characteristics: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to conductor when connector is compressed around conductor.
a. Tinned copper, C and H shaped.

H. UL KDER - Split-Bolt Pressure-Type Grounding and Bonding Cable Connector:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
c. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. d. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Bolts that surround cable and bond to cable under compression when nut is tightened.
a. Tinned copper.

I. UL KDER - Signal Reference Grid Grounding and Bonding Connector:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. e. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed for the purpose.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 10
100% Design Submittal

2.7 INTERSYSTEM BONDING BRIDGE GROUNDING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Devices that provide means for connecting communications systems grounding and bonding conductors at service equipment or at disconnecting means for buildings or structures.

B. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment for Communications: UL CCN KDSH; including UL 467.

C. UL KDSH - One-Piece Intersystem Bonding Bridge Grounding Connector:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. b. Madison Electric Products; business of Southwire Company, LLC.

2. General Characteristics: Zinc-alloy one-piece construction; six terminating points; gangable.

D. UL KDSH - Two-Piece Intersystem Bonding Bridge Grounding Connector:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. Raco Taymac Bell; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. d. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Copper body and polycarbonate cover; four terminating points.

2.8 GROUNDING AND BONDING BUSBARS
A. Description: Miscellaneous grounding and bonding device that serves as common connection for multiple grounding and bonding conductors.

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467.

D. UL KDER - Equipment Room Grounding and Bonding Busbar:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
b. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
c. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. ILSCO.
e. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. f. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics:
a. Bus: Rectangular bar of annealed copper.
b. Mounting Stand-Off Insulators: Lexan or PVC.
1) Comply with UL 891 for use in 600 V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

3. Options:
a. Dimensions: 1/4 by 4 inch in cross section; length as indicated on Drawings. b. Predrilled Hole Pattern: 9/32 inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inch apart suitable for installing specified grounding and bonding connectors.
c. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide 4 inch clearance to access rear of bus. Brackets and bolts must be stainless steel.

E. UL KDER - Rack and Cabinet Bonding Busbar:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
b. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc. c. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. Panduit Corp.
e. Or equal.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 12
100% Design Submittal

2. General Characteristics:
a. Bus: Rectangular bar of hard-drawn solid copper.
b. Horizontal Mounting Dimensions: Designed for mounting in 19 inch or 23 inch wide equipment racks or cabinets.
c. Vertical Mounting Dimensions: Designed for mounting in 72 inch 36 inch high equipment racks or cabinets.
d. Predrilled Hole Pattern: Accepts connectors for grounding and bonding conductor sizes 14 AWG to 2/0 AWG.
e. Mounting Hardware: Stainless steel or copper-plated, for attachment to rack.

2.9 SIGNAL REFERENCE GRIDS
A. Description: Means for providing low-impedance path to ground over a large area, approximating an equipotential plan, while simultaneously mitigating large current spikes from faults or lightning.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single manufacturer.

C. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467.

D. UL KDER - Mesh-Type Signal Reference Grid:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. Continental Industries; brand of Hubbell Utility Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. c. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc.

2. General Characteristics: Conductive metal wire mesh for field-fabrication of grid. a. Wire Size: Min 8 AWG and as specified in Drawings.
b. Wire Material: Copper-clad steel.
c. Spacing: 4 inch.
d. Welded or brazed intersections.

E. UL KDER - Tape-Type Signal Reference Grid:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 13
100% Design Submittal

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Continental Industries; brand of Hubbell Utility Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
c. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc. d. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Conductive copper tape for field-fabrication of grid. a. Copper Tape Dimensions: 40 mil (18 ga.) thick by 1.6 inch wide. b. Spacing: 24 inch.
c. Welded or brazed fittings for intersections.

2.10 GROUNDING (EARTHING) ELECTRODES
A. Description: Grounding electrodes include rod electrodes, ring electrodes, metal underground water pipes, metal building frames, concrete-encased electrodes, and pipe and plate electrodes.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single manufacturer.

C. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467.

D. UL KDER - Rod Electrode:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Continental Industries; brand of Hubbell Utility Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. c. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 ft (19 mm by 3 m).

E. UL KDER - Plate Electrode:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ALLTEC LLC.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 14
100% Design Submittal
b. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. c. Or equal.

2. General Characteristics: 1/4 inch thick, hot-dip galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SELECTION OF GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Bonding Conductor: 4 AWG or 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

D. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inch wide and 1/16 inch thick.

E. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inch wide and 1/16 inch thick.

F. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, size as indicated on Drawings.

1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

3.2 SELECTION OF CONNECTORS
A. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Reference Standards:

1. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 15
100% Design Submittal
point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor and install in conduit.

2. Consult Engineer for resolution of conflicting requirements.

C. Special Techniques:

1. Grounding Electrode Conductors:
a. Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
b. Where conductors pass through floor slabs, walls, etc., install in conduit or sleeve. c. When conductors need to be installed in conduit for mechanical protection, use non-ferrous conduit to avoid a choke effect for fault currents.

2. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. a. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. b. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. c. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps.
d. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.
e. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
f. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1) Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate adjacent parts.
2) Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3) Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if disconnect-type connection is required, use bolted clamp.
g. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1) Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use bolted clamp connector or bolt lug-type connector to pipe flange by using one of lug bolts of flange. Where dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2) Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with bolted connector. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 16
100% Design Submittal
3) Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
h. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
i. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install as indicated on Drawings. 1) Locate attachment points not subject to mechanical damage, but accessible for inspection.
2) Use exothermic weld process for wire sizes 1/0 AWG and larger. When wire size is smaller than 1/0 AWG, weld a pigtail of 1/0 AWG to structural steel then mechanically connect the two wires.

3. Electrodes:
a. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.
1) Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.
2) Use exothermic welds for below-grade connections.
3) Drive rods vertically and do not allow them to be deformed or driven at an angle. Where driving is difficult or rock is encountered, use purposedesigned drilling equipment, install rod into drilled hole and backfill around rod using ground enhancement material (GEM) mixed with water to form a slurry in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Test Wells: Install as indicated on Drawings. Ring Electrode: Install grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column or other indicated item, extending around perimeter of building, area, or item indicated.
1) Bury ring electrode not less than 24 inch from building's foundation. 2) Lay underground conductors slack, and where exposed to mechanical injury, protect by pipes or other substantial guards. If guards are iron pipe or other magnetic material, electrically connect conductors to both ends of the guard. c. Concrete-Encased Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Grounding at Service:
a. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors must be connected to ground bus. Install main bonding jumper between neutral and ground buses.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 17
100% Design Submittal

5. Grounding Separately Derived Systems:
a. Transformers: Bond neutral and ground with a bonding jumper at the equipment in accordance with NEC 250.102. Connect to the grounding electrode system via the electrode grounding conductor in accordance with NEC Table 250.66 or as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Generators and UPS: When indicated on the Drawings as a separately derived system, bond neutral and ground with a bonding jumper at the equipment in accordance with NEC 250.102. Connect to the grounding electrode system via the electrode grounding conductor in accordance with NEC Table 250.66 or a indicated on the Drawings.
c. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at generator location. Electrode must be connected to equipment grounding conductor and to frame of generator.

6. Grounding Underground Distribution System Components:
a. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

7. Grounding and Bonding Manholes and Handholes: Install as indicated on Drawings.

Bond exposed-metal parts to ground rod or grounding conductor. Grounding and Bonding of Raceways, Cable Trays, Boxes, and Enclosures:
a. Terminate metallic conduit into pressed steel boxes using double locknuts (same metal type as conduit) and insulated grounding bushings. b. Terminate metallic conduit into metallic gasketed enclosures using Meyers grounding type conduit hubs.
c. Use insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type lugs to terminate metallic conduits containing equipment grounding conductors into sheet steel boxes. d. Bond metallic electrical system components such as cable trays, supports, brackets, braces, boxes, etc. to the raceway system if they are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system or are subject to vibration and loosening. e. Provide a bonding jumper across hinged metal panels or doors when electrical components in excess of 24 volts are mounted on the moveable panel. f. Provide a grounding bushing at the end of metallic conduits that terminate in free air.
g. Provide 12 AWG insulated green wire bonding jumper for metal outlet boxes that contain receptacles. Connect wire from receptacle ground terminal to box using grounding screw.

8. Equipment Grounding:
a. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with feeders and branch circuits. b. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. c. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heattracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
d. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260526 - 18
100% Design Submittal
1) Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned copper, not less than 6 AWG. 2) Gates: Must be bonded to grounding conductor with flexible bonding jumper.
3) Barbed Wire: Strands must be bonded to grounding conductor.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method in accordance with IEEE Std 81. c. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

B. Nonconforming Work:

1. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

2. Remove and replace defective components and retest.

C. Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports.

1. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
a. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less:
10 Ω (ohms).
b. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity over 500 kVA: 5 Ω (ohms).

3.5 PROTECTION
A. After installation, protect grounding and bonding cables and equipment from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 260526
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260529 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Support, anchorage, and attachment components.

2. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.

B. Related Requirements:

1. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on the project.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: channel support systems, conduit support hardware, and accessories.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support systems.

1. Hangers. Include product data for components.

2. Slotted support systems.

3. Equipment supports.

4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. For hangers and supports for electrical systems.

1. Include design calculations and details of hangers.

2. Include design calculations for seismic restraints.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260529 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the jurisdiction of the project location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified structural professional engineer to design hanger and support system.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics for Nonmetallic Channel Systems and Accessories: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1.

2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Channel:

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Channel Material: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.

3. Fittings and Accessories Material: 5052-H32 aluminum alloy.

B. Stainless Steel Channel:

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Stainless steel, Type 316.

C. Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel Channel:

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Hot-dipped galvanized steel.

D. Nonmetallic Channel:

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Channel Material: Ultraviolet resistant FRP.

3. Fittings and Accessories Material: Stainless steel, Type 316 or compatible non-metallic.

E. Accessories: Conduit clamps, straps, hangers, rods, backplates, anchors, nuts, washers, etc. to correspond with channel material as listed in the SELECTION Article. Use of galvanized steel components is only allowed with galvanized steel channel. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260529 - 3
100% Design Submittal
F. Threaded Rod: 3/8-inch diameter, minimum.

G. Expansion Anchors: 3/8-inch minimum diameter. Equal to “Kwik Bolt”, manufactured by McCullock Industries; “Wej it” manufactured by Wej it Expansion Products; or “Kwik-Bolt II” manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SELECTION OF CHANNEL
A. Dry, indoor, conditioned, non-process space: Hot dipped galvanized steel.

B. Outdoor, process areas, or areas indicated on Drawings as “DUST”, “DAMP”, or WET”:

Aluminum and/or stainless steel, depending upon load requirements.

C. Areas indicated on Drawings as “CORROSIVE”: Nonmetallic.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the following standards as applicable for selection and installation of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA NEIS 101: Standard for Installing Steel Conduits.

2. NECA NEIS 102: Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduits.

3. NECA NEIS 105: Standard for Installing Metal Cable Tray Systems.

4. NECA NEIS 111: Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways.

B. Provide vibration and seismic controls with hangers and supports in accordance with requirements specified in "Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Attach support systems only to structural components. Use concrete expansion anchors for attachment to concrete surfaces.

D. Provide a minimum of 1/2-inch clearance between wall and equipment when installing surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc.

E. Space conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, at no more than 8-foot intervals, and as required to obtain rigid construction.

F. Remove burrs and grind smooth sharp edges from channel support ends. Fit ends with plastic end caps.

3.3 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260529 - 4
100% Design Submittal
B. Use 3000 psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup:

1. Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. a. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

2. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION 260529
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260533.13 - CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Conduits and fittings.

B. Products Installed, but Not Furnished, under This Section:

1. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for conduit identification labels.

C. Related Requirements:

2. Section 260010 “Supplemental Requirements for Electrical” for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, test agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section.

3. Section 260533.16 “Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems” for conduit bodies, outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, and junction boxes.

4. Section 260533.23 "Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems” for wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Section 260529 “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems” for channel support systems and miscellaneous mounting components.

6. Section 260543 “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems” for underground construction requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Conduit: A structure containing one or more duct raceways.

B. Duct Raceway: A single enclosed raceway for conductors or cable.

C. Duct Bank: An arrangement of conduit providing one or more continuous duct raceways between two points.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s cut sheet for each type of product used on project. Note some conduit types listed may not be used on the project. Refer to the Conduit Selection Table in PART 3. Indicate in the submittal, the areas where specific materials are used. If multiple manufacturers of a given type of conduit or fittings are proposed, submit those cut sheets rather than stating “or equal.”
B. Conduit Layouts: For Division 26, 27, and 28 conduits installed underground and concealed within buildings and structures. Show equipment, boxes, handholes, manholes, routing, materials, and sizing. Provide layouts at an appropriate scale for clarity. Submission of separate drawings for power, lighting and control for one area is acceptable. Provide schedule for easy cross check.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 TYPE EMT DUCT RACEWAYS AND ELBOWS
A. Description: Electrical metallic tubing per NEC Article 358.

B. Listing Criteria: UL FJMX - Electrical Metallic Tubing, including UL 797.

C. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized steel (EMT-S).

2.3 TYPE ERMC-A DUCT RACEWAYS, ELBOWS, COUPLINGS, AND NIPPLES A. Description: Rigid aluminum 6063 alloy conduit, elbows, couplings, and nipples per NEC Article 344.

B. Listing Criteria: UL DYWV - Rigid Nonferrous Metallic Conduit, including UL 6A.

C. Long radius elbows as indicated in Section 260543 “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.”
D. PVC Coated Type: 40 mil PVC on exterior and 2 mil urethane on interior (ERMC-A-PVC).

2.4 TYPE ERMC-S DUCT RACEWAYS, ELBOWS, COUPLINGS, AND NIPPLES A. Description: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, elbows, couplings, and nipples, with a hot-dipped galvanized finish inside and out and per NEC Article 344. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Listing Criteria:

1. UL DYIX – Rigid Ferrous Metal Conduit, including UL 6.

2. UL DYJC – Rigid Ferrous Metal Conduit with Polyvinyl Chloride Coating, including UL 6.

2.5 TYPE FMC DUCT RACEWAYS
A. Description: Flexible metal conduit per NEC Article 348.

B. Listing Criteria: UL DXUZ - Flexible Metal Conduit, including UL 1.

C. Material: Hot-dipped galvanize steel (FMC-S).

2.6 TYPE FMT DUCT RACEWAYS
A. Description: Flexible metal tubing composed of hot-dipped galvanized steel strips shaped into interlocking convolutions per NEC Article 360.

B. Listing Criteria: UL ILJW - Flexible Metallic Tubing, including UL 1652.

2.7 TYPE LFMC DUCT RACEWAYS
A. Description: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit, Type UA, per NEC Article 350.

B. Listing Criteria: UL DXHR – Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit, including UL 360.

C. Material: Steel (LFMC-S).

D. Manufacturer: Sealtite®, Type UA, as manufactured by Anaconda, continuously interlocked flexible steel conduit with sunlight and chemical resistant PVC jacket.

2.8 TYPE LFNC-B DUCT RACEWAYS
A. Description: Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit, Type B, suitable for outdoor use and corrosive areas, per NEC Article 356.

B. Listing Criteria: UL DXOQ – Liquid-tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit, including UL 1660.

C. Manufacturer: Carflex® as manufactured by Carlon, or equal. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 4
100% Design Submittal

2.9 TYPE PVC DUCT RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Description: Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit, sunlight resistant, rated for use with 90 degree C conductors in exposed and direct or concrete encased applications, per NEC Article 352.

B. Listing Criteria: UL DZYR – Rigid Nonmetallic PVC Conduit, including UL 651.

C. Type: Schedule 40 and Schedule 80.

2.10 FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

1. ERMC-A: Use cast aluminum fittings.

2. ERMC-S: Use cast malleable iron fittings.

B. Listing Criteria as Applicable:

1. UL 514B – Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings.

2. UL DWTT – Conduit Fittings.

3. UL FKAV – Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings.

4. UL ILNR – Flexible Metallic Tubing Fittings.

5. UL DXAS – Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit Assemblies.

C. Refer to Section 260533.16 “Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems” for conduit bodies such as LB’s, T’s, and C’s.

D. Metal Fittings:

1. EMT Fittings: Die cast, rain and concrete tight, compression type. Set screw type not permitted.

2. RMC Fittings: Threaded type. Threadless fittings and split couplings are not permitted.

3. FMC Fittings: Malleable iron, zinc plated, insulated throat.

4. Fittings for PVC Coated Conduit: Minimum 40 mil thick PVC coating, with overlapping sleeves of one pipe diameter in length to protect threaded joints.

5. LFMC Fittings: Three-piece screw in type, malleable iron.

6. Expansion Fittings: Include flexible external bonding jumper.

7. FMT Bushings: Insulated.

8. Grounding and Bonding Hubs, Bushings, and Hardware:
a. Grounding Hub: Meyers type.
b. Locknuts: Cast steel or aluminum.
c. Bushings: Insulated throat with lay-in type lugs.

E. Nonmetallic Fittings:

1. PVC Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3 and match conduit material.

2. LFNC Fittings: Dust-tight, liquid-tight, chemical resistant thermoplastic/nylon construction with tapered thread hub and neoprene O-ring gasket. Push-on fittings are prohibited.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 5
100% Design Submittal

2.11 ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE CORROSION-RESISTANT COMPOUNDS FOR THREADED CONDUIT.

A. Description: Cold galvanizing compound, 95 percent zinc rich paint.

B. Listing Criteria: UL CCN FOIZ; including UL Subject 2419.

2.12 SOLVENT CEMENTS
A. Description: Solvent cement to join Type PVC duct raceways and fittings.

B. Listing Criteria: UL CCN DWTT; including UL 514B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SELECTION OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Appendix Table 260533.13-1 for conduit application requirements.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent installation requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with the following as applicable:

1. Relevant Article of NFPA 70.

2. NECA NEIS 101 – Standard for Installing Steel Conduits.

3. NECA NEIS 102 – Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit.

4. NECA NEIS 111 – Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways.

5. NEMA FB 2.10 – Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with NonFlexible Metallic Conduit or Tubing.

6. NEMA FB 2.20 – Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with Flexible Electrical Conduit and Cable.

7. NEMA FB 2.40 – Installation Guidelines for Expansion and Expansion/Deflection Fittings.

C. Special Installation Techniques:

1. General Requirements for Installation of Duct Raceways:
a. Complete duct raceway installation before starting conductor installation. b. Underground Installations: Refer to additional requirements in Section 260543 “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems”. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 6
100% Design Submittal
c. Provide stub-ups through floors with coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Plug coupling until conduit is extended above floor to final destination or a minimum of 2 feet above finished floor. d. Coordinate stub-up locations with approved shop drawings for equipment to position stub-up directly below appropriate section of motor control center, switchboard, or switchgear.
e. Provide a 4-inch-thick concrete housekeeping pad at slab and grade penetrations.

Provide a 45-degree, 3/4 inch chamfer at exposed edges. f. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends in conduit run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.
g. Maximum continuous conduit run: 300 feet. Reduce distance by 75 feet for each 90-degree elbow.
h. Make bends in duct raceway using large-radius preformed ells except for parallel bends. Field bending must be in accordance with NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Provide only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.
i. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. j. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. k. Drainage: Arrange conduit system to allow liquids such as water, condensation, etc. to drain away from equipment served. If conduit drainage is not possible, plug conduits using conduit seals.
l. Moisture Control: Install devices to seal duct raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal interior of duct raceways using “Duxseal” or seal fitting at the following points:
1) Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
2) Where an underground service duct raceway enters a building or structure. 3) Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4) Conduit extending into pressurized duct raceway and equipment. 5) Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points.
6) Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
m. Do not install duct raceways or electrical items on "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment.
n. Do not install conduits within 2 inches of the bottom side of a metal deck roof. o. Keep duct raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal duct raceway runs above water and steam piping.
p. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits trade size 2 and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Ream inside of conduit to remove burrs.
q. Install pull wires in empty duct raceways. Provide polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at both ends of pull wire. Cap underground duct raceways designated as spare above grade alongside duct raceways in use. Use threaded cap. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 7
100% Design Submittal
r. Install duct raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures without hubs with locknuts on both sides of enclosure wall. Install locknuts hand tight, plus one-quarter turn more.
s. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to trade size 1-1/4 and insulated throat metal bushings on trade size 1-1/2 and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. Install Meyers grounding type hubs when conduits terminate at NEMA 3R, 4, and 4X gasketed enclosures.

2. Do not install aluminum duct raceways or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

3. Protect metallic finish conduit installed in contact with concrete or below grade with two coats of bitumastic paint, heat shrink tubing, or approved equivalent. Provide protection from 12 inches below bottom of concrete to not less than 6 inches above surface of concrete.

4. Rigid Metal Conduit (Type ERMC):
a. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound that maintains electrical conductivity to threads of duct raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's published instructions.
b. The use of running threads is prohibited. Where such threads are necessary, use a three piece union.

5. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit (Type ERMC-A-PVC and ERMC-S-PVC):
a. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions for clamping, cutting, threading, bending, and assembly.
b. Provide PVC-coated sealing locknut for exposed male threads transitioning into female NPT threads that do not have sealing sleeves, including transitions from PVC couplings/female adapters to PVC-coated ERMC elbows in direct-burial applications. PVC-coated sealing locknuts must not be used in place of conduit hub. PVC-coated sealing locknut must cover exposed threads on PVC-coated ERMC duct raceway.
c. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated duct raceway with manufacturer-approved corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

6. Flexible Conduit Connections (Types FMC, LFMC, and LFNC):
a. Provide a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement, and for transformers and motors.
b. Include adequate slack to allow for thermal expansion and mechanical vibration. c. Orient outdoor flexible connections to provide drip loop to avoid accumulation of water at equipment connection points.

7. Non-Metallic Conduit (Type PVC):
a. Do not install Type PVC conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 122 degrees F. Conductor ratings must be limited to 75 degrees C except where ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 8
100% Design Submittal
installed in a trench outside buildings with concrete encasement, where 90 degrees C conductors are permitted.
b. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for solvent welding and fittings.

8. Duct Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
a. Comply with spacing requirements as noted on Structural Drawings. b. Arrange duct raceways to cross building expansion joints with expansion fittings at right angles to the joint.
c. Arrange duct raceways to ensure that each is surrounded by minimum of 1 inch of concrete without voids.

9. Stub-ups at Slabs: Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

10. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
a. Provide EMT or ERMC for duct raceways.
b. Provide a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

11. Duct Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration:
a. Provide insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than 4 AWG. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

12. Duct Fittings: Use only fittings listed for use with each type of tubing or conduit and in accordance with specific fittings listed under PART 2.

13. Install fittings in accordance with NEMA FB 2.10 guidelines. a. ERMC-A-PVC and ERMC-S-PVC: Patch and seal joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Provide sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
b. EMT: Provide setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

14. Expansion-Joint Fittings: Install where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction and wherever conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

15. Duct Raceways Penetrating Rooms or Walls with Acoustical Requirements: Seal duct raceway openings on both sides of rooms or walls with acoustically rated putty.

16. Identification: Install identification tags at conduits in accordance with Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
D. Interfaces with Other Work:

1. Coordinate installation with other trades in advance of installation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 9
100% Design Submittal

2. Restore walls, floor, and roof to original condition such as watertight, fire rating, smooth and/or painted finish after duct raceway penetration.

3. Coordinate with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduit hangers and supports.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 APPENDICES
A. Table 260533.13-1: Conduit Selection Guidelines
Table 260533.13-1
Conduit Selection Guidelines
Raceway Type Location / Application
EMT Indoor air conditioned spaces in Administration / Office buildings including electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, control rooms, toilets, and offices.

ERMC-A Indoor and outdoor applications, except where other types are listed.

Exposed, non-corrosive areas.

Concealed, non-corrosive areas.

Under slabs in slab on grade construction / stub-ups.

When installed underground or in contact with concrete, paint with two coats of bitumastic paint or use
ERMC-A-PVC.

ERMC-A-PVC Allowed for use in lieu of painting ERMC-A with two coats of bitumastic paint.

ERMC-S Not used on this project.

ERMC-S-PVC Not used on this project.

FMC Flexible connections used in conjunction with EMT.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conduits for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.13 - 10
100% Design Submittal
Table 260533.13-1
Conduit Selection Guidelines
Raceway Type Location / Application
FMT Flexible connections to light fixtures in conjunction with EMT.

LFMC Flexible connections used in conjunction with ERMC types.

LFNC-B Flexible connections used in designated corrosive areas.

Limited to 2-inch trade size.

PVC-40 Concrete encased duct banks.

Embedded in concrete slabs or structures.

Underground elbows are to be ERMC type.

PVC-80 Direct buried.

Areas designated as corrosive.

Protection of grounding electrode conductors.

Protection of lightning conductors.

Underground elbows are to be ERMC type.

END OF SECTION 260533.13
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260533.16 - BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Conduit bodies.

2. Metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, rings, and covers.

3. Nonmetallic outlet boxes, device boxes, rings, and covers.

4. Junction boxes and pull boxes.

5. Cover plates for device boxes.

6. Hoods for outlet boxes.

B. Products Installed, but Not Furnished, under This Section:

1. See Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for electrical equipment labels.

C. Related Requirements:

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on the project.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers' Published Instructions:

1. Metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, rings, and covers.

2. Nonmetallic outlet boxes, device boxes, rings, and covers.

3. Junction boxes and pull boxes.

4. Cover plates for device boxes.

5. Hoods for outlet boxes.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

B. Listing Criteria as Applicable:

1. UL 514A – Metallic Outlet Boxes.

2. UL 514B – Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings.

3. UL 514C – Standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.

4. UL 514D – Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices.

5. UL BGUZ – Junction and Pull Boxes.

6. UL QCIT – Metallic Outlet Boxes.

7. UL QCMZ – Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes.

2.2 CONDUIT BODIES
A. Description: Means for providing access to interior of conduit or tubing system through one or more removable covers at junction or terminal point.

B. Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. Refer to Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems” for conduit types and fittings used on the project.

C. Use mogul type (with rollers) for metal conduit bodies sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger by Appleton Electric.

2.3 METALLIC OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, RINGS, AND COVERS A. Outlet and Device Box Description: Box having pry out openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides of the back, or both, for entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting outlet box cover. Outlet boxes do not include provisions to mount devices. Device boxes include provisions to mount a device to the box.

B. Extension Ring Description: Ring intended to extend sides of outlet box or device box to increase box depth, volume, or both.

C. Pressed Steel Boxes: Hot dipped galvanized with hot-dipped galvanized tile rings. For use when recessed in walls or indoors exposed in non-process ceiling areas.

1. Lighting outlet boxes: 4-11/16 inch square, 2 1/8 inch deep, minimum.

2. Device boxes with electronics device (i.e. smart switch or receptacle, occupancy sensor, dimmer, etc.): Largest size for number of gangs required.

D. Cast Boxes: Type FD (deep) only. Type FS not permitted. Copper free aluminum. PVC coated when used with PVC coated conduits. Gasketed cover when used outdoors. Stainless steel screws for covers.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 3
100% Design Submittal
E. Pedestal Device Boxes: Cast aluminum, polished finished. Used for laboratory bench receptacles.

F. Floor Boxes: Concrete tight. Number and type of devices as indicated on Drawings.

2.4 NONMETALLIC OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, RINGS, AND COVERS A. Outlet and Device Box Description: Box having pry out openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides of the back, or both, for entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting outlet box cover. Outlet boxes do not include provisions to mount devices. Device boxes include provisions to mount a device to the box.

B. Only allowed in conjunction with PVC schedule 80 exposed conduit installations.

C. Type FD (deep) box only. Type FS (shallow) box not allowed.

2.5 JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES
A. Description: Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable. Boxes that contain terminals, relays, surge protective devices, or devices mounted on the cover are specified under Section 262716 “Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures”.

B. NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Material: Sheet steel, minimum 14 gauge, without knockouts.

2. Construction: Flanged box, galvanized with continuous weld seams that are ground smooth.

3. Cover: Gasketed, hinged, fastened with quick connect door clamp.

C. NEMA 4X Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel, minimum 14 gauge, without knockouts.

2. Construction: Flanged box, continuous weld seams that are ground smooth.

3. Cover: Gasketed, hinged, fastened with quick connect door clamp.

2.6 COVER PLATES FOR DEVICES BOXES
A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring device. Refer to Section 262726 “Wiring Devices” for requirements.

B. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Flush Mounted Devices in Indoor Administrative Spaces: Includes offices, conference rooms, break rooms, restrooms, and control rooms. Smooth, high impact thermoplastic or nylon. Color to match wiring device.

3. Material for Flush Mounted Devices in Indoor Industrial Spaces: Includes electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, janitor closets, and indoor process areas. Type 302 (18-8) high nickel stainless steel.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 4
100% Design Submittal

4. Material for Surface Mounted Devices: Match box material.

2.7 HOODS FOR OUTLET BOXES
A. Description: Hood to mount to box for to create weatherproof while in use condition.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates (Hoods) for Switches and Receptacles: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, in-use weather-resistance, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.8 METALLIC OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, RINGS, AND COVERS A. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

2. Listing Criteria: UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A.

B. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.

3. Samples:
a. Floor Box Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors and flooring inserts for each type of floor box.
b. Raised Floor Box Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors and flooring inserts for each type of floor box.
c. Recessed Access-Floor Box Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors and flooring inserts for each type of floor box.
d. Concrete Box Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors and flooring inserts for each type of floor box.

C. UL QCIT - Metallic Outlet Boxes and Covers:

1. Description: Box having pryout openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides of the back, or both, for entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting outlet box cover, but without provisions for mounting wiring device directly to box.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 5
100% Design Submittal
b. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
d. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
e. Topaz Lighting & Electric.
f. Or equal.

3. Options:
a. Material: Sheet aluminum.
b. Sheet Metal Depth: Minimum 2 inch.
c. Cast-Metal Depth: Minimum 2.4 inch.
d. Luminaire Outlet Boxes and Covers: Nonadjustable, listed and labeled for attachment of luminaire weighing up to 50 lb or more than 50 lb and marked with maximum allowable weight.
e. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes and Covers: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing up to 70 lb.

D. UL QCIT - Metallic Conduit Bodies:

1. Description: Means for providing access to interior of conduit or tubing system through one or more removable covers at junction or terminal point. In the United States, conduit bodies are listed in accordance with outlet box requirements.

E. UL QCIT - Metallic Device Boxes:

1. Description: Box with provisions for mounting wiring device directly to box.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Arlington Industries, Inc.
d. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
e. Raco Taymac Bell; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 6
100% Design Submittal
f. Topaz Lighting & Electric.
g. Or equal.

3. Options:
a. Material: Sheet aluminum.
b. Sheet Metal Depth: minimum 2 inch.
c. Cast-Metal Depth: minimum 2.4 inch.

F. UL QCIT - Metallic Extension Rings:

1. Description: Ring intended to extend sides of outlet box or device box to increase box depth, volume, or both.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
d. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
e. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
f. Or equal.

G. UL QCIT - Metallic Floor Boxes and Floor Box Covers:

1. Description: Box mounted in floor with floor box cover and other components to complete floor box enclosure.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. AFC Cable Systems; Atkore International.
c. Arlington Industries, Inc.
d. FSR Inc.
e. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.

H. UL QCIT - Metallic Raised-Floor Boxes and Floor Box Covers:

1. Description: Box mounted in raised floor with floor box cover and other components to complete floor box enclosure.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 7
100% Design Submittal
c. Wiremold; Legrand North America, LLC.
d. Or equal.

I. UL QCIT - Metallic Recessed Access-Floor Boxes and Recessed Floor Box Covers:

1. Description: Floor box with provisions for mounting wiring devices below floor surface and floor box cover with provisions for passage of cords to recessed wiring devices mounted within floor box.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. FSR Inc.
c. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
d. Or equal.

J. UL QCIT - Metallic Concrete Boxes and Covers:

1. Description: Box intended for use in poured concrete.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
d. Topaz Lighting & Electric.
e. Or equal.

2.9 NONMETALLIC OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, RINGS, AND COVERS A. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and use.

2. Listing Criteria: UL CCN QCMZ; including UL 514C.

B. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 8
100% Design Submittal

C. UL QCMZ - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes and Covers:

1. Description: Box having pryout openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides or the back, or both, for entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting outlet box cover, but without provisions for mounting wiring device directly to box.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. d. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
e. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
f. Or equal.

D. UL QCMZ - Nonmetallic Conduit Bodies:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Arlington Industries, Inc.
c. Topaz Lighting & Electric.
d. Or equal.

E. UL QCMZ - Nonmetallic Device Boxes:

1. Description: Box with provisions for mounting wiring device directly to box. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 9
100% Design Submittal

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Arlington Industries, Inc.
c. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
d. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
e. Raco Taymac Bell; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. f. Or equal.

F. UL QCMZ - Nonmetallic Extension Rings:

1. Description: Ring intended to extend sides of outlet box or device box to increase box depth, volume, or both.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Arlington Industries, Inc.
c. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. d. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
e. Or equal.

G. UL QCMZ - Nonmetallic Floor Boxes and Floor Box Covers:

1. Description: Box mounted in floor with floor box cover and other components to complete floor box enclosure.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Arlington Industries, Inc.
c. Cantex Inc.
d. Raco Taymac Bell; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. e. Or equal.

H. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and use.

2. Listing Criteria: UL CCN BGUZ; including UL 50 and UL 50E.

I. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 10
100% Design Submittal

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.

J. UL BGUZ - Indoor Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Description: Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. b. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. Hubbell Industrial Controls; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
e. Square D; Schneider Electric USA.
f. Or equal.

3. Options:
a. Degree of Protection: As per Drawings..

K. UL BGUZ - Indoor Cast-Metal Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Description: Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Adalet.
b. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
d. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
e. Or equal.

3. Options:
a. Degree of Protection: As per Drawings.

L. UL BGUZ - Indoor Polymeric Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Description: Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable.

Redlands City CouncilOctober 21, 2025

Redlands City Council
October 21, 2025